®
2010 MAXIMA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOREWORD
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
could
affect
its
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
WARNING
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
XM Radio requires
subscription, sold
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
separately after first
90 days. Not available
in Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more
information, visit
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon and
www.xmradio.com.
Clarion.
Gracenote is a
registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc. The
Gracenote logo and
logo type, and the
“Powered by
Gracenote” logo are
trademarks of
Gracenote.
© 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
For Canadian customers
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
3
4
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-35)
2. Adjustable headrest (P. 1-10)
3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-39)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags (P. 1-39)
6. Head Restraints (P. 1-7)
7. Front seat belts (P. 1-13)
8. Supplemental front-impact air
bags (P. 1-39)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) (P. 1-46)
11. Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-52)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-23)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0065
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-18)
2. Windshield wiper and washer
switch (P. 2-26)
3. Windshield (P. 8-19)
4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-45)
5. Power windows (P. 2-42)
6. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key™,
keys, request button
(P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2, 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-25)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
10. Tire chains (P. 8-39)
11. Headlight and turn signal
switch (P. 2-28)
12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
13. Fog light switch
(if so equipped) (P. 8-26)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-27)
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-20)
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-18)
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
5. Exterior trunk lid release/request button
(P. 3-13)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel
recommendation (P. 3-21, P. 9-3)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-21)
9. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-6)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-5)
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-45)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-24)
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-50)
5. HomeLinkா universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-53)
6. Interior mirrors (P. 3-25)
7. Glove box (P. 2-39)
8. Cup holders (P. 2-38)
9. Console box (P. 2-40)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
11. Rear seat (P. 1-5)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8.
9.
Shift paddles (if so equipped) (P. 5-15)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-26)
10. Display screen/Navigation system*
(if so equipped) (P. 4-16)
11. Display screen/Navigation system*
controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-16)
12. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
13. Glove box (P. 2-39)
14. Display screen (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-4)
15. Climate controls (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-41)
16. Audio system controls (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-48)
17. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-50)
18. Audio system controls (P. 4-48)
19. Climate controls (models with
Navigation system) (P. 4-44)
20. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
WIC1535
21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
22. Ignition switch (behind the steering
wheel) (P. 5-7)
1.
2.
Side and center vents (P. 4-40)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-28)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
and Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-114, 4-118)
4.
5.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-39, P. 2-33)
Security indicator light (P. 2-24)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
23. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
3.
6.
7.
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
Outside mirror controls (P. 3-27)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-20)
Rear control cancel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
5. Fuse block (P. 8-21)
6. Battery (P. 8-14)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
11. Engine coolant reservoir * (P. 8-7)
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir *
(P. 8-13)
NOTE:
* Side covers removed for clarity.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WDI0662
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-11
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-13
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-14
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
NISSAN Intelligent
Key™ warning light
Fog light indicator
light (if so equipped)
or
or
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-13
2-14
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-15
Supplemental air
bag warning light
Brake warning light
2-11
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-15
2-15
2-16
Indicator
light
Name
Page
2-14
Malfunction indica-
tor light (MIL)
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) indicator light
Security indicator
light
Charge warning
light
2-11
2-12
2-12
Slip indicator light
2-16
2-16
2-16
Engine oil pressure
warning light
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) position indi-
cator light
2-10
2-14
Low tire pressure
warning light
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
CRUISE main
switch indicator light
Master warning light
2-13
Vehicle Dynamic
Control OFF indica-
tor light
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Folding rear seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Adjustable headrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Small children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
ARS1152
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P
(Park).
WRS0860
Forward and backward
FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Operating tips
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
●
Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
See “Automatic drive positioner ” in “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-
sitioner operation.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0862
LRS0238
WRS0861
Manual (if so equipped)
Power (if so equipped)
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat
cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
(manual) or move the switch forward or backward
(power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior trunk access
For models without a rear center console, the
trunk can be accessed from the passenger side
of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as
shown.
1
Push down on the button on the rear parcel
shelf.
᭺
2
Fold down the passenger side seatback.
᭺
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
LRS0863
Thigh extension (driver’s side only, if
so equipped)
Pull up and hold the lever to extend the front
portion to the desired position.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
WRS0866
FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so
equipped)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
WRS0867
LPD0459
To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach
Secondary trunk lid release (if so
equipped)
1
through the opening and pull on the strap
᭺
located behind the seat.
For models with a rear center console, the trunk
can be accessed through the access panel be-
tween the rear seats, as shown.
The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-
cal key to prevent unauthorized access.
●
●
Fold down the center arm rest.
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk com-
partment access lid lock. Fold down the
trunk compartment access lid. For more in-
formation on the mechanical key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the Pre-driving
checks and adjustments chapter.
1
●
Pull the rear seat trunk release handle
.
᭺
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
WRS0868
LRS0893
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
Center armrest
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with
risk of serious injury or death in
collision.
a
a head restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0887
WRS0134
LRS0888
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
4. Stalks
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0889
LRS0890
LRS0891
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
1
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
the adjustment notches
must be installed
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock knob
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if so
equipped)
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement the
other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust
the headrests properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the adjustable headrest stalks
or remove the adjustable headrests. Do
not use the seat if the adjustable head-
rests have been removed. If the headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust
the headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position. Failure to follow these
instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of the adjustable headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death in
a collision.
SPA1025
LRS0898
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the
headrests are adjustable.
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped with
an adjustable headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0887
WRS0134
LRS0888
To raise the headrest, pull it up.
Components
1. Adjustable headrest
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
Adjustment
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the
center of the seat occupant’s ears.
4. Stalks
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0889
LRS0890
LRS0891
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down.
Removal
Install
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable headrests.
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing
the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
1
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
justment notches
must be installed in the
᭺
2
hole with the lock knob
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
headrest down.
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.
4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose
in the vehicle.
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-
cupant uses the seating position.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0134
SSS0016
WARNING
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
● The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is placed in
the ON position with all doors closed
and all seat belts fastened, it may indi-
cate a malfunction in the system. Have
SSS0014
WARNING
the system checked by
dealer.
a
NISSAN
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
● All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PREGNANT WOMEN
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
WRS0864
Front seat shown
Fastening the seat belts
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
1
Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
᭺
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
WRS0137
WRS0138
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
᭺
᭺
on the hips as shown.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion.
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
᭺
● The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
WARNING
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor.
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139
LRS0242
Unfastening the seat belts
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
᭺
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage”earlier in this section. To
1
Checking seat belt operation
adjust, pull out the adjustment button
and
᭺
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
2
position , so the belt passes over the center of
᭺
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-
der belt anchor into position.
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
WARNING
WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-
straints” later in this section.
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint
Forward-facing child restraint
Booster seat
SMALL CHILDREN
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-
formation.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
LARGER CHILDREN
WARNING
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
WRS0256
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
●
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
WRS0718
LATCH system lower anchor locations
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
WRS0700
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
LRS0662
LRS0243
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
Top tether anchor point locations
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “In-
stalling top tether strap” later in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-
tails.
1
Anchor points
shelf.
are located on the rear parcel
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0801
WRS0802
LRS0673
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Rear-facing – step 3
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
LRS0674
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 4
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0256
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 1
Rear-facing – step 2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0669
LRS0670
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 3
Rear-facing – step 4
Rear-facing – step 5
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
WRS0763
WRS0799
Rear-facing – step 6
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0800
LRS0671
WRS0697
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 6
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for
headrest adjustment information.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
ing position or a different child restraint.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint or headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest
is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head restraint or
headrest when the child restraint is
removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-
able headrest” in this section for head re-
straint or headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper child restraint
fit, try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0680
LRS0667
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 3
Forward-facing – step 4
Forward-facing – step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 8.
WRS0681
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
Forward-facing – step 6
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to
position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback. If the headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the headrest when the child restraint is re-
moved. See “Adjustable headrest” in
this section for headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the rear parcel shelf.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
LRS0865
LRS0243
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
Forward-facing – step 10
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
status light
should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
1
1. Flip up the anchor cover
from the anchor
᭺
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
LRS0455
LRS0453
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
high back booster seat
should be used.
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
LRS0464
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
LRS0454
WRS0699
Front passenger position
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint or headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head restraint or head-
rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head restraint or
headrest when the booster seat is re-
moved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-
able headrests” in this section for head re-
straint or headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
LRS0865
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
Seat belt with pretensioner
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
status light
may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side-impact collisions. The side air bags are de-
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
WRS0031
● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1042
ARS1043
ARS1044
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1045
WRS0256
SSS0101
WARNING
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.
SSS0188
WRS0032
WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0159
SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s
and passenger’s side
9. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor)
10. Seat belt with pretensioner
11. Side satellite sensor
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of collision
are similar to those of a higher severity frontal
impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal
collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper front air bag sys-
tem operation.
WRS0466
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
6. Crash zone sensor
7. Occupant classification system control
unit
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air Bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and the occu-
pant classification sensor (pattern sensor). Infla-
tor operation is based on the severity of a colli-
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For the
front passenger, the occupant classification sen-
sor is also monitored. Based on information from
the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a
crash, depending on the crash severity and
whether the front occupants are belted or un-
belted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag
may be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight detected on
the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used.
If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passen-
ger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the
seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-
nated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in this
section for further details. One front air bag inflat-
ing does not indicate improper performance of
the system.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Status light
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
The front passenger air bag status light
located above the radio. The light operates as
follows:
is
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). It is in the bottom of the
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
described later. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
tion can vary depending on the front passenger
seat belt sensors.
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
is
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
LRS0865
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
Front passenger air bag and status light
section: The light
is OFF to indicate
WARNING
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled. Based
on the weight on the seat detected by the occu-
pant classification sensor, the Advanced Air Bag
System determines whether the front passenger
air bag should be automatically turned OFF as
required by the regulations.
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the
most effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section
for proper use and installation.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, will
blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (pattern sensor).
● A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the supplemental front air bag system.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or
is against, these air bag modules during inflation.
The side air bag and curtain air bags will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
LRS0259
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bags may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
WARNING
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
pants. However, all of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-
ply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
Seat belts with pretensioners (front
seats)
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released
and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
WRS0895
LRS0100
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located
on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
light
will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-
sioner system may not function properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-
ellite sensors, occupant classification system,
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all
related wiring.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
Repair and replacement procedure
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
system should be inspected by
a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
sioner systems need servicing:
● If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioner must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioner
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioner
cannot be repaired.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-10
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . .2-17
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Climate control seat switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .2-34
Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . .2-36
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Dual Panel Moonroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Rear Control Cancel Switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear power sun shade (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-53
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Operating the HomeLinkா universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-55
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8.
9.
Shift paddles (if so equipped) (P. 5-15)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-26)
10. Display screen/Navigation system*
(if so equipped) (P. 4-16)
11. Display screen/Navigation system*
controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-16)
12. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-53)
13. Glove box (P. 2-39)
14. Display screen (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-4)
15. Climate controls (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-41)
16. Audio system controls (models without
Navigation system) (P. 4-48)
17. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-50)
18. Audio system controls (P. 4-48)
19. Climate controls (models with
Navigation system) (P. 4-44)
20. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
WIC1535
21. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
22. Ignition switch (behind the steering
wheel) (P. 5-7)
1.
2.
Side and center vents (P. 4-40)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-28)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
and Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-114, 4-118)
4.
5.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-39, P. 2-33)
Security indicator light (P. 2-24)
Cruise control main/set switches
(P. 5-18)
23. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
3.
6.
7.
(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
24. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
Outside mirror controls (P. 3-27)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-35)
Trunk lid release switch (P. 3-20)
Rear control cancel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LIC1381
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
7. Engine coolant temperature gauge
8. Vehicle information display
3. Warning/indicator lights
4. Fuel gauge
5. Odometer/twin trip odometer
6. Trip odometer change button
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the display:
3
Push the change button
as follows:
to change the display
᭺
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
Resetting the trip odometer:
3
Push the change button
for more than 1
᭺
second to reset the currently displayed trip
odometer to zero.
Elapsed time, driving distance and average
speed information is also available. Refer to
“Control panel buttons” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
section in this manual.
LIC1382
LIC1383
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
1
The odometer
records the total distance the
᭺
vehicle has been driven.
2
The twin trip odometer
of individual trips.
records the distance
᭺
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency”section for immediate
action required.
LIC1384
LIC1386
TACHOMETER
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1
into the red zone
.
᭺
1
normal range
when the gauge needle points
᭺
CAUTION
within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
With the ignition placed in the ON position, press
CAUTION
the
button as described in the charts be-
low to activate various features of the automatic
anti-glare rearview mirror.
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
Malfunction Indicator Light
Push and hold
Feature:
the
a
(Push button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings)
button for about:
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
1 second
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
8 seconds
10 seconds
LIC1385
Compass enters calibration mode
● For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
FUEL GAUGE
For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments” section.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
LIC1487
COMPASS DISPLAY
Push the
button for about 1 second when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
toggle the outside temperature and compass
1
direction display
on or off. The display will
᭺
indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the
button for about 8
seconds. The current zone number will ap-
pear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the
button repeatedly to toggle
through the zone numbers until the desired
number appears in the display. Once you
have selected a zone number, the display
will show a compass direction within a few
seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
WIC0355
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
High beam indicator light (blue)
or
or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Security indicator light
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indi-
cator light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-
sition indicator light
Slip indicator light
Low tire pressure warning light
Master warning light
Cruise main switch indicator light
Fog light indicator light (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indicator light
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light
If equipped, the following lights come on briefly
and then go off:
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
or
,
,
,
,
,
,
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
,
or
,
,
,
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low brake fluid warning light
● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
Charge warning light
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
CAUTION
WARNING
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
or
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
TPMS malfunction:
Engine oil pressure warning
light
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section in this
manual.
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”
section.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™
warning light
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
WARNING
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch in the ON position, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
The Intelligent Key warning light warns of a mal-
function with the electrical steering lock system
(if so equipped) or the Intelligent Key system.
● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds
and then turns off.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
If the light comes on while the engine is stopped,
it may not be possible to free the steering lock or
to start the engine. If the light comes on while the
engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. How-
ever, in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for
repair as soon as possible.
CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-
mation display warnings appear.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the indicator light shows the shift selec-
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
WARNING
Cruise main switch indicator
light
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner seat belt systems need servicing and your
vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Front fog light indicator light (if
so equipped)
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) indicator
light
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when
the front fog lights are ON. See “Fog light switch”
later in this section.
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The malfunction indicator light may also come on
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,
and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4
liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Operation
Front passenger air bag status
light
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
●
Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
emission control system and/or CVT mal-
function has been detected. Check the fuel-
filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and con-
After a few driving trips, the
light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
tinue to drive the vehicle. The
should turn off after a few driving trips. If
the light does not turn off after a few
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
light
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
●
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-
gine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL)
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady
or blinks while the engine is running, it may indi-
cate a potential emission control and/or CVT
malfunction.
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
CAUTION
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has
been turned off.
Security indicator light
Key reminder chime
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-
gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-
ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” later in this section.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you push the push-button ignition switch to
the ON position. The light will turn off after about
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-
tor light while you are driving, have the Vehicle
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Light reminder chime
Slip indicator light
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
WIC1102
WIC1406
1
The vehicle information display
is located on
᭺
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:
Press the
button, located on the instru-
●
●
●
Intelligent Key operation information
some indicators and warnings
other information
ment panel just behind the steering wheel, to
display the following modes:
MPG → MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →
Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning
For details about the Intelligent Key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1093
LIC1097
WIC1266
Fuel Economy mode
Average speed mode
Time/Miles (km) mode
The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-
play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.
The average speed mode can be selected to
display the average miles per gallon and miles per
hour since the last reset.
The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to
show the time and distance driven since the last
reset.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1095
LIC1096
LIC1541
Range mode
Exterior Temperature mode
Setting mode
The range mode can be selected to give you an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly calcu-
lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.
The exterior temperature mode can be selected
to provide you with the temperature outside of
your vehicle.
The setting mode allows you to set reminders or
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or
language displays.
In the setting mode screen press
to:
to move
●
●
●
Alert
Maintenance
Options
and press
to select the menu.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC1044
LIC1046
LIC1045
Alert mode
Reset mode
Maintenance mode
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying
you of time to rest or icy conditions.
The reset mode can be selected in any screen
that allows for preferences to be programmed.
Once the screen is selected, you have the option
to reset the selected distances or time to a new
setting.
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the
following:
The time to rest alert lets you know when you
have been traveling for a long time and may need
a break.
●
●
●
●
engine oil
oil filter
tires
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-
tions may exist.
other
Set a desired interval by pushing
to high-
light the maintenance field and pressing
.
The reset mode will open up and allow you to
enter the desired distance.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can select the language, unit or change the
dial effects by using the
button and
pressing
.
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.
LIC1542
LIC1098
Warning mode
Options mode
The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and
pressing
.
Language: English or French
Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For more information about
potential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-
play warnings and indicators”later in this section.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
Dial effects: This changes effects of the indicator
needles when ON. The needles in the meter
sweep and the ring illumination will be brightened
gradually when the engine is started.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC1407
9. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator
10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator
4. Low windshield washer fluid warning
5. No key warning
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators
11. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge
indicator
6. Parking brake warning
7. Shift P warning
1. Door and trunk open warning
2. Push warning
12. Steering lock release malfunction indicator
(if so equipped)
8. Engine start operation indicator
3. Low fuel warning
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door and trunk open warning
No key warning
SHIFT P warning
This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk
has been opened when the engine is running.
This warning illuminates following two condi-
tions:
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-
tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.
Push warning
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-
not start the engine.
If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. Move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position or push the ignition switch to the
ON position.
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC position when the shift selec-
tor is moved to the P (Park) position.
Check for the following causes and perform
the assigned remedies:
An inside warning chime will also sound.
See “Shift P warning”in this section for additional
information.
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried
with you is discharged completely. Re-
place the battery with a new one.
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)
position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to
“Push warning” in this section.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition
switch in the ON position and then to the LOCK
position.
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not
registered to the system. Use the regis-
tered Intelligent Key.
For additional information about Intelligent Key,
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
Low fuel warning
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.
Engine start operation indicator
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position with
the shift selector in the P (Park) position.
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
A chime will also sound.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal depressed.
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This warning illuminates when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
This warning illuminates when the parking brake
is set and the vehicle is driven.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-
tor
Steering lock release malfunction indica-
tor (if so equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the steering
wheel cannot be released from the LOCK posi-
tion.
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.)
If this indicator illuminates, push the ignition
switch while lightly turning the steering wheel
right and left.
If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in
the “Starting and driving” section.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indica-
tor
LIC0301
This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also
sounds.
Your vehicle has two types of security systems:
●
●
Vehicle security system
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with
you when leaving the vehicle.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dis-
charge indicator
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-
tem will not arm.
The alarm is activated by:
●
opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to stop an activated alarm
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
trunk lid locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing
the
button on the Intelligent Key, or press-
ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen-
ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the
door handle.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
Vehicle security system activation
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
armed even if the windows are open.)
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for
example, when interference is caused by another
registered key, an automated toll road device or
automatic payment device on the key ring), restart
the engine using the following procedures:
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch,
power door lock switch or mechanical key.
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automati-
cally shifts into the armed phase. The
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
by pressing the
gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately 10
seconds.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
LIC0474
WIC1434
Security indicator light
SWITCH OPERATION
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
᭺
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward
᭺
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
B
(Slower) or
(Faster). Also, the intermit-
᭺
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
tent operation speed varies in accordance
with the vehicle speed. (For example, when
the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent
operation speed will be faster.)
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
NOTE:
CAUTION
You can turn on or turn off the driving
speed dependent intermittent wiper func-
tion for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Comfort settings”in the “Monitor,
climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-
tion systems” section.
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir tank with washer fluid con-
centrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the grille
if spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir tank
2
Low — continuous low speed operation
᭺
3
High — continuous high speed operation
᭺
4
Push the lever up
tion of the wiper.
to have one sweep opera-
᭺
5
Pull the lever toward you
to operate the
᭺
LIC1387
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
voir tank. Do not use the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir tank to mix the
washer fluid and water.
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
●
●
The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal).
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Ꮨ
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start blink-
ing, or the color of the light will be-
come reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
● Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional head-
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncom-
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
LIC1388
Type B
NOTE:
The top few rows of wires on the rear win-
dow are not part of the rear window de-
froster system. These wires make up the
antenna for the audio system.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
WIC1435
WIC1436
Type A
Type B
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
When turning the switch to the
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
posi-
᭺
2
When turning the switch to the
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
posi-
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Place the headlight switch in the AUTO po-
1
sition
.
᭺
2. Place ignition in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5
minute timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
LIC1086
WHA1170
the OFF,
, or
position.
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located on the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-
come discharged.
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.
Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
WARNING
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
WIC1438
Headlight beam select
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position. Turn the
position for full
1
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
᭺
illumination when driving at night.
and the
light illuminates.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
᭺
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
᭺
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC1412
WIC1439
WIC1440
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Turn signal
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
to the
switch to the
position, then turn the fog light
position.
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
᭺
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in
the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then
Lane change signal
AUTO,
or
position.
turn the fog light switch to the
position.
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
᭺
Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights when driving
at night.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
The instrument brightness control will not adjust
the brightness when the headlights or parking
lights are off.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
HORN
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
LIC1389
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLIMATE CONTROL SEAT SWITCH (if
so equipped)
3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the
control knob. The climate controlled seat
blower remains on low speed for approxi-
mately 60 seconds after turning the switch
on or selecting the desired temperature.
● Any liquid spilled on the seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth
● The climate controlled seat has an air
filter. Do not operate the climate con-
trolled seat without an air filter. This
may result in damage to the system.
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or
cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be
sure to turn the control knob to the Off
(center) position
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled
seat, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● If any malfunctions are found or the
climate controlled seat does not oper-
ate, turn the switch off and have the
system checked by your NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
LIC1410
● The battery could run down if the cli-
mate control seat is operated while the
engine is not running.
The climate controlled seat warms up or cools
down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air
from the surface of the seat. The climate control
switch is located on the center console.
● Do not use the climate control seat for
extended periods or when no one is
using the seat.
The climate controlled seat can be operated as
follows:
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the control knob to the H (Heat) side or
to the C (Cool) side, as desired. The indica-
tor light on the control knob will illuminate.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
objects. This may result in damage to
the climate controlled seat.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
LIC1543
LIC0421
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
The switch is located on the center console.
The heated steering wheel system is designed to
operate only when the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
1. Start the engine.
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
indicator light will come on.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the
steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a
temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator
light will remain on as long as the system is on.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel system off manually. The indicator light will
go off.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLET
NOTE:
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch
is turned on, the system will not heat the
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.
LIC1392
WIC0534
Front center console
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.
The power outlet in the front console box is
powered directly by the vehicle battery. The out-
let on the center console near the shift selector is
powered only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The
indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and
driving” section.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● The power outlets are not designed for
use with a cigarette lighter.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
LIC1393
LIC0016
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
MAP POCKETS
SEATBACK POCKETS
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC1395
LIC1074
Front
SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so
equipped)
CUP HOLDERS
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
WARNING
● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.
The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down
armrest in the rear seat back.
LIC0423
LIC1396
Rear
GLOVE BOX
To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down
armrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower the
lid.
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
mechanical key when locking
the glove box.
1
2
or unlocking
᭺
᭺
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WIC1120
WIC1120
LIC0702
CONSOLE BOX
Upper half
Lower half
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box.
Pull up on the lever to open the lower half of the
console box. A power outlet is located inside the
console box and there is storage for compact
discs.
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for a phone or iPodா cord routing to
the power outlet.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
LIC0748
WIC1032
GROCERY HOOKS
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
LIC0802
LIC1397
To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain-
ers.
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
3. Driver’s side automatic window switch
4. Front passenger’s side automatic win-
dow switch
To remove a cargo net, detach the net from the
retainers.
5. Left rear passenger’s side automatic
window switch
6. Right rear passenger’s side automatic
window switch
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
WIC1265
LIC1399
Front passenger’s power window
Rear power window switch
switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
window, push the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it down until the desired window
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
1
position is reached . To close the window, pull
᭺
the switch to the first detent and continue to hold
up until the desired window position is reached
1
position is reached . To close the window, pull
᭺
the switch to the first detent and continue to hold
up until the desired window position is reached
2
.
᭺
2
.
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto-reverse function
If the windows do not close
automatically
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-
lowing procedure to initialize the power window
system.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Close the door.
3. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
for more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
LIC0410
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by automatic function to confirm
the initialization is complete.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other
windows.
If the power window automatic function does not
operate properly after performing the above pro-
cedure, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately low-
ered.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
CAUTION
2
toward
.
᭺
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
switch in any direction while the moonroof is
sliding to stop it in the desired position.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Tilting the moonroof
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch
2
toward
. Release the switch, then push
᭺
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
2
the switch toward
moonroof up.
again to tilt the
᭺
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch
LIC1408
1
toward
.
᭺
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
WARNING
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the
front passenger’s door is opened during this
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-
roof is canceled.
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch
1
toward
.
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so
equipped)
When closing:
CAUTION
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
LIC1411
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. The automatic
moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds,
even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is
canceled.
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
To tilt the moonroof down and close the
sunshade at the same time, push the switch
When closing:
Sliding the moonroof
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
To slide the moonroof:
2
to the close position until it reaches the
᭺
second detent.
●
●
●
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch
1
toward the open position until it reaches
the second detent. If the switch
᭺
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
When tilting down:
1
is
᭺
pushed to the first detent, only the sunshade
will open.
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
2
toward the close position until it reaches
᭺
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
2
the second detent. If the switch
is
᭺
pushed to the first detent, the moonroof will
close but the sunshade will remain open.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
To open or close the moonroof part way,
1
᭺ ᭺
2
release the switch
roof is sliding open or closed. The moonroof
will stop at the desired position.
or
while the moon-
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
Tilting the moonroof
WARNING
To tilt the moonroof:
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
●
To tilt the moonroof up, push and release the
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
3
tilt switch . When the moonroof is open, it
᭺
will automatically close and then tilt up.
●
To tilt the moonroof down, push and release
3
2
the tilt switch
or push the switch
᭺
᭺
toward the close position until it reaches the
first detent.
Instruments and controls 2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To close the sunshade:
CAUTION
●
To fully close the sunshade, push the switch
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
2
toward the close position until it reaches
the second detent.
᭺
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
2
●
Pushing the switch
to the first detent will
᭺
close the moonroof only.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
WIC1445
Sunshade
To open the sunshade:
●
To fully open the sunshade, push the switch
1
toward the open position until it reaches
᭺
the first detent.
●
To fully open the sunshade and the moon-
1
roof together, push the switch
toward the
᭺
open position until it reaches the second
detent.
2-48 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
REAR POWER SUN SHADE (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
● Do not place objects (such as newspa-
pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen
inlet port. Doing so may entangle these
objects in the screen when it is extend-
ing or retracting, causing improper op-
eration or damage to the screen.
● Do not push the sun shade arm with
your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
Improper operation or damage to the
screen may result.
● Do not hang any object on the arm rail
as this may result in improper operation
or damage the screen.
LIC1391
WIC1443
The rear control cancel switch operates when the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON posi-
tion.
The rear sun shade operates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position.
● Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing
so may elongate the screen. Improper
operation or damage to the screen may
result.
The rear sun shade switch is located on the front
console.
The rear control cancel switch is located on the
left side of the instrument panel.
●
●
●
To raise the sun shade, push the upper side
● To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from the
sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet
port.
1
Pushing the rear control cancel switch to the
CANCEL side will deactivate the following
switches in the rear center armrest:
of the switch
.
᭺
To lower the sun shade, push the lower side
2
of the switch
.
᭺
● Do not allow children near the rear sun
shade system. They could be injured.
●
●
Automatic climate control
Audio
The switch need not be held down.
● Do not pull or push the rear sun shade.
This could cause improper operation or
damage it.
Pushing the rear control cancel switch to the ON
side restores the control to the rear center arm-
rest.
Instruments and controls 2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHT
Lights remain on for a maximum of 30
seconds.
NOTE:
The footwell and doorstep lights illuminate
when the driver and passenger doors are
opened regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after 30 minutes while doors
are open to prevent the battery from be-
coming discharged.
– Driver’s door is opened.
Lights remain on for a maximum of 30
seconds after driver’s door is closed.
– Ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi-
tion.
Lights remain on for a maximum of 30
seconds.
CAUTION
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and
locked.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
WIC1550
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when
doors are open.
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
3
●
When the switch is in the OFF position
,
᭺
the front and rear personal lights will not
illuminate, regardless of door position.
1
●
When the switch is in the ON position
,
᭺
the front and rear personal lights will illumi-
nate, regardless of door position. The light
will go off after 30 minutes unless the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position.
●
When the switch is in the center DOOR
2
position
, the front and rear personal
᭺
lights will illuminate under the following con-
ditions:
– Driver’s door is unlocked while the igni-
tion switch is placed in the OFF position.
2-50 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
WIC1494
WIC1549
WIC1476
Models without moonroof
Models with moonroof
CONSOLE LIGHT
FRONT
1
The console light
᭺
will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
turn them off, press the switches again.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
Instruments and controls 2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK LIGHT
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
LIC1409
LIC1413
Models with dual panel moonroof
REAR
To turn on the rear lights, press and release the
1
switch
.
᭺
To turn the rear lights off, press and release the
1
switch
.
᭺
2-52 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-
ming.
WIC0986
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original trans-
mitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Program-
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)
1
until the indicator light
blinks (after 20
᭺
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLinkா surface.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.
Instruments and controls 2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
grammed device, press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train the
HomeLinkா to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another per-
son for convenience.
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-
grammed. (To program the remaining
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-
gram button located on the garage door
opener’s motor to activate the “training
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.
“clear”
HomeLinkா buttons.
all
previously
programmed
WIC0987
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter but-
ton.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
NOTE:
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-
ing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
Once you have pressed and released the
program button on the garage door open-
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
Use the help of a second person for conve-
nience to assist when performing this step.
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-
ing the garage door opener’s program but-
2-54 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
●
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 76 mm) away from the
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
-
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible damage to the garage door opener
components.
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா
buttons.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINKா BUTTON
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLinkா surface.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-
ton. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
Instruments and controls 2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
This transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690
2-56 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Secondary trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
CAUTION
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with
the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the
registration process requires erasing all memory
in the Intelligent Key components when register-
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
WPD0363
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
1.
2.
Two Intelligent Keys
Mechanical keys with built-in transpon-
der chip (inside Intelligent Keys)
Key number plate
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
3.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-
ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System components.
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
These keys have a transponder chip in the key
head.
See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the
“Instruments and Controls” section of this
manual.
Valet hand-off
The master key can be used for all the locks.
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the Intelligent Key only, not
the mechanical key.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-
dures below.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as four NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
position.
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,
which can be used in case of a discharged bat-
tery.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-
through with the mechanical key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
The mechanical key can be used for operation in
the same way as an ordinary key.
See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls”section and “Seats”in
the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
LPD0461
Driver’s side
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1
Turning the key toward the front
locks all doors.
of the vehicle
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear
of the
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
3
returning the key to neutral
᭺
toward the rear again within 60 seconds unlocks
4
all doors
.
᭺
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Opening and closing windows
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
●
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
●
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
WPD0291
WPD0381
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the
the lock position . When locking the door this
᭺
᭺
door.
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position
2
.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
᭺
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2
side) to the unlock position
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and
a chime will sound after the door is closed.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side).
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
LIC0716
●
All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the OFF position.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
1. Close all doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
the
position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
WARNING
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
CAUTION
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pushed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged, insert the Intelligent key into the Intelli-
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the
discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For additional information, see “Push
Button Ignition Switch “ in the “Starting and
Driving” section.
●
When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function or
pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may af-
fect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-
nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-
trically, unlocking the steering wheel with the
ignition switch in the Lock position is impossible
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when the vehicle battery is completely dis-
charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-
sible even if the Intelligent key is inserted into the
Intelligent Key port. Pay special attention that the
vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-
tered and used with one vehicle. For information
about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-
gent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPA2038
WPD0375
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
OPERATING RANGE
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch
●
Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
1
.
᭺
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
●
After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1
from each request switch
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
WPD0376
WPD0377
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
OPERATION
Locking doors
1. Move the shift selector to the “P” position.
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Make sure the Intelligent Key is not left
in the vehicle.
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
1
3. Push any door handle request switch
᭺
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the trunk opener
switch.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
WPD0369
● When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
NOTE:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
●
●
●
Doors lock with the door handle request
switch when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
Lockout protection
Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.
Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0377
WPD0369
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 60
seconds after pushing the request switch.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1
2. Push the door handle request switch
.
᭺
●
●
Opening any door.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
Pushing the ignition switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a maximum
of 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
1
4. Push the door handle request switch
᭺
again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
ing operations.
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
LPD0478
WPD0359
Opening the trunk lid
Locking doors
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
A
1. Push the trunk opener request switch
for
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
᭺
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
2. Close all doors.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
3. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
CAUTION
Lockout protection
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
5. All doors will be locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The interior light illuminates for a maximum of 30
seconds when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 30
seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations.
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.
Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Opening windows
WPD0360
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simulta-
neously.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the
Key.
button on the Intelligent
●
To open the windows, press the
but-
ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 60 sec-
The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the Intelligent Key.
onds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
minute after pressing the
button.
●
●
Opening any doors.
Pushing the ignition switch.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The panic alarm stops when:
●
●
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
Pushing the request switch on the driver or
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
WPD0364
WPD0361
Releasing the trunk lid
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
Press the
button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
by pressing and holding the
button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
WPD0362
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-
Possible Cause
Remedy
Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
play and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or position.
ON position.
When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-
play and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position and the shift selector is not in the P tion and place the ignition switch in the
(Park) position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
OFF position.
The shift “P” warning light appears on the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and the shift selector is not in the P position.
(Park) position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely.
knob placed in the LOCK position
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk.
When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door
The outside chime sounds for approximately
2 seconds.
A door is not closed securely.
The door handle request switch is pushed
before the door is closed.
Push the door handle request switch after
the door is closed.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When closing the trunk lid
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
TRUNK LID
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
WPD0365
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly.
᭺
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
2
Push the lever at the front of the hood to the
side as illustrated with your fingertips and
raise the hood.
᭺
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make
sure it locks into place.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
LPD0394
LPD0186
NOTE:
Cancel switch
OPENER OPERATION
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key™” in this section.
When the cancel switch located inside the glove
box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with
the trunk lid release switch or with the Intelligent
Key.
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
LPD0459
WIC1401
SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
1
To open the trunk lid from the rear seat:
᭺
WARNING
●
Fold down the center arm rest.
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
●
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk com-
partment access lid lock. Fold down the
trunk compartment access lid. For more in-
formation on the mechanical key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in this section.
●
Pull the rear seat trunk release handle.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
To close, push the trunk lid down securely.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and
lock the doors.
WPD0454
LPD0482
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when all
doors are unlocked.
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the
following operations.
1
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
refueling.
while
᭺
● Unlock all doors with the keyfob.
● Unlock all doors with the key.
● Push the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
2. To open the fuel filler door, push the right
side of the fuel filler door to release.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
WARNING
CAUTION
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
the
Malfunction Indicator Light
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
(MIL) to illuminate. If the
light
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap
is loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
The
light should turn off after a
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
WARNING
Entry/Exit function
The automatic drive positioner system will make
the steering wheel move up automatically when
the driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver
get into and out of the seat more easily. The
steering wheel moves back into position when
the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch
is pushed.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
For more information, see “Automatic drive posi-
tioner” in this section.
Telescopic operation
LPD0458
1
Push the switch
forward or backward to ad-
᭺
just the steering wheel to the desired position.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Tilt operation
1
Push the switch
steering wheel to the desired position.
up or down to adjust the
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
LPD0457
MANUAL OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
1
Pull the lock lever
all the way towards you:
᭺
●
●
Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-
2
ward in direction
to the desired position.
᭺
Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
3
direction
to the desired position.
᭺
Lock the steering wheel by releasing the lock
lever. Make sure the lock lever has returned to its
original position to lock the steering wheel in
place.
WPD0297
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIRRORS
1
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR
2
To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.
᭺
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
3
Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.
᭺
CAUTION
NOTE:
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
᭺
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-
edly downward.
WPD0324
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity
mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is
open.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
WPD0446
LPD0469
Type A
Type B-Without compass
Type B and Type C
Type A
2
2
The indicator light
will illuminate when the
The indicator light
will illuminate when the
᭺
᭺
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, press the
button as described:
●
the
O
button for inside mirrors without
compass.
●
To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the
off.
button. The indicator light will turn
●
the
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
The indicator light will turn off.
●
To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the button again. The indicator light
will turn on.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
LPD0470
LPD0237
Type C-With compass
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
●
the
|
button for inside mirrors without
compass.
1
Move the small switch
to select the right or left
᭺
●
the
button for inside mirrors with
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position
compass.
2
using the large switch
.
᭺
The indicator light will turn on.
Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic
anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa-
tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors” in
this section.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the shift selector to R (Reverse). Both
mirrors will turn downward.
●
the
button on rearview mirror with
compass (Type C).
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
The mirror surfaces will return to their original
position when any of the following have occurred:
The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
●
●
●
The shift selector is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
●
the
|
button on rearview mirror without
compass (Type B).
The outside mirror control switch is set to the
neutral or center position.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
●
the
button on rearview mirror
equipped with compass (Type C).
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The indicator light will turn on.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if
so equipped)
For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-
view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in this section.
The electric control type outside mirrors (if so
equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or
de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear win-
dow defogger switch to activate the heating
function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or
the heating function will automatically turn off
after approximately 15 minutes.
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically dim
during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare
from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The auto-
matic anti-glare feature operates only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both out-
side mirror surfaces downward to provide better
rear visibility close to the vehicle when the small
switch is in either the L or R position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when
starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate
when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in the
neutral position, neither mirror will turn
downward when the shift selector is moved
to R (Reverse).
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
●
the
O
button on rearview mirror without
compass (Type B).
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
The automatic drive positioner system has two
features:
●
●
Memory storage function
Entry/exit function
MPA0008
WIC1403
Foldable outside mirrors
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-
umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these
procedures to use the memory system.
1. Set the Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) shift selector to the P (Park) position.
2. Place the ignition in the ON position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,
and outside mirrors to the desired positions
by manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, see
“Seats”in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section and
“Outside mirrors” in this section.
2. While the indicator light for the memory
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
●
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
fuse opens, the memory storage function will
be canceled and must be restarted before a
stored memory position can be set again.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restart the memory storage function. You
can also restart the memory storage function
using the following procedure.
onds, press the
button on the keyfob.
The indicator light will blink. After the indica-
tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
memory setting.
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
During this step, do not place the ignition
switch in any position other than ON.
tion, press the
button on the keyfob. The
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
driver’s seat and outside mirrors will move to the
memorized position.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,
push the memory switch (1 or 2).
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
NOTE:
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approxi-
mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
After the indicator light goes off, the se-
lected positions are stored in the selected
memory (1 or 2).
If a new memory position is saved to the
memory switch, the keyfob automatically
re-links.
Once the memory storage function has been
restarted, you can store a memory position.
See “Memory storage function” in this sec-
tion.
Confirming memory storage
Selecting the memorized position
●
Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and push the SET switch. If the main memory
has not been stored, the indicator light will
come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.
When the memory has stored the position,
the indicator light will stay on for approxi-
mately 5 seconds.
If a new memory is stored in the same memory
switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position,
then:
Linking a keyfob to a stored memory
position
●
Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-
ing procedure.
●
Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and push the memory switch (1 or 2).
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-
tion.
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The driver’s seat, steering column, and outside
mirrors will move to the memorized position with
the indicator light blinking, and then the light will
stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
the entry/exit function using the following proce-
dure.
●
●
When the shift selector is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga-
tion system. See “Comfort & Convenience set-
tings” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section of this
manual.
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
and automatic operation steering column will au-
tomatically move when the shift selector is in the
P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into
and out of the driver’s seat more easily.
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
steering wheel will move up when the driver’s
door is opened and the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position.
The automatic drive positioner system will not
work or will stop operating under the following
conditions:
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to
the previous position when the driver’s door is
closed and the ignition switch is pushed.
●
When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7
km/h).
●
When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
celed. See “Comfort & Convenience settings” in
the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems” section of this manual.
●
When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat is turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
Restarting the entry/exit function
●
●
When the seat has been already moved to
the memorized position.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to adjust the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (Type A) . . . . . .4-41
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (Type B) . . . . . .4-44
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Rear seat air conditioner (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-49
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Image viewer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Using the image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . .4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . .4-84
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88
iPodா* Player Operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-123
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Manual Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-132
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-133
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-135
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-135
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-135
Vehicle Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-137
Handset Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139
Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-141
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142
iPodா* Player Operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93
Music Box™ Hard Drive audio system
without Navigation System (if so equipped). . . . . . .4-97
Music Box™ Hard Drive audio system with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so equipped). . . . .4-110
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . .4-114
Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-144
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-145
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-145
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-148
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-148
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-149
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-157
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-162
Speaker Adaptation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-165
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
LHA1146
5. BRIGHT + (brightness control) button
6. BRIGHT – (brightness control) button
7. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-5)
8. SETTING button (P. 4-9)
1. STATUS button (P. 4-6)
2. INFO button (P. 4-7)
3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-5)
4.
OFF brightness control button
(P. 4-15)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference symbols:
CAUTION
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown on the display. These keys can only be
selected using the NISSAN controller.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
WHA0883
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
CONTROLLER
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
2
play using the main directional buttons
or the
᭺
3
1
center dial . Then press the ENTER button
᭺
᭺
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
to select the item or perform the action.
4
The BACK button
has two functions:
᭺
●
Go back to the previous display (cancel).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
If you press the BACK button
during setup,
2. Menu Selections:
᭺
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Pacific time zone,
Mountain time zone, etc.).
●
Finish setup.
3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.
4
In some screens pressing the BACK button
accepts the changes made during setup.
᭺
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for that screen (for example, 1/9).
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted (for example, Manually set the time
zone).
LHA1300
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details:
To display the status of the audio, climate control
system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS
button.
1. Header:
The following information will appear when the
STATUS button is pressed multiple times:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Clock” key, then
select the “Time Zone” key).
Audio → Audio and climate control system →
Audio and fuel consumption → Audio
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
●
If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position may con-
tinue to be displayed.
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery
cables, the display might show (**.*).
WHA1149
LHA1301
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
Fuel economy
Press the INFO button. The display screen
shows vehicle information for your convenience.
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller to
display Average Fuel Economy, Distance to
Empty and Fuel Economy History.
Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key
using the NISSAN controller.
The information shown on the screen should be a
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.
Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0922
LHA1302
LHA1303
Fuel economy record
Changing the maintenance interval
Maintenance items
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key, then select the “View” key using
the NISSAN controller.
Select one of the Reminder keys (Engine Oil, Oil
Filter, Tire or Other Reminder) using the NISSAN
controller to display the screen to change the
maintenance interval.
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-
nance” key using the NISSAN controller; the
maintenance information will be displayed on the
screen.
The average fuel consumption history will be
displayed in a graph form along with the average
fuel for the previous reset-to-reset period.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-
troller. Use the NISSAN controller to change the
maintenance interval. To accept the changes,
press the BACK button.
Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the
NISSAN controller.
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
●
●
The “Reset” key is selected.
The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
●
The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA0839
LHA1304
Displaying the maintenance notice re-
minder
HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to display
the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-
cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-
tor light will illuminate when it is ON.
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-
tings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
following conditions are met:
Audio settings
●
The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0929
LHA0930
WHA0823
Brightness/contrast:
Display off:
Display settings
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-
trast to lower or higher.
Select the “Display ON” key. The amber indicator
next to “Display ON” turns off and the message
above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
not automatically turn off until that operation is
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.
Select the “Display” key. The Display settings
screen will appear.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the screen on:
●
Press the SETTING button, select the “Dis-
play” key and then select the “Display ON”
key. Then set the screen to on by pressing
the ENTER button, or
●
Hold the
OFF button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-
ing display”will appear and the “Display ON”
key will be automatically turned on (no am-
ber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
LHA1305
LHA1306
Switch beeps settings
Camera settings
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.
Select the “Switch Beeps” key. The Switches
Beeps settings screen will appear.
Select the “Camera” key. The Camera settings
screen will appear.
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.
When this option is on (indicator light illumi-
nated), predictive course lines will be displayed
when the RearView monitor is displayed on the
screen. See “RearView Monitor” in this section
for more information.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daylight Savings Time:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out.
LHA1307
LHA0933
Time Zone:
Clock
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
●
●
●
●
●
Pacific
Clock Format:
Mountain
Central
Eastern
Atlantic
Choose either the 12h (12-hour) clock display or
the 24h (24-hour) clock display.
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
Newfoundland
Aleutian
Hawaii
Alaska
LHA1308
WHA1151
Adjust Clock:
Comfort & Convenience settings
To adjust the time, select the + or - key for the
hour until the desired number is reached. Repeat
the process for the minutes on the line below.
Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the
NISSAN controller. The comfort and conve-
nience option screen will be displayed.
To accept the changes made and return to the
Clocks Settings screen, select the OK key.
You can set the following operating conditions by
highlighting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller. The amber indicator (box at the right of
the selected item) alternately turns on and off
each time the ENTER button is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within 1 minute.
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
WHA1152
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on
or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for
easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
switch to the ACC position, the steering wheel
moves to the previous position.
Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjust
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher
(right) or lower (left).
Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to change
the duration of the automatic headlight off timer
from 0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, 90-, 120-, 150- and
180-second periods.
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backward
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat
moves to the previous position.
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0934
LHA0935
LHA0936
Select Language:
Select Units:
Language / Units
Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the
“Español” key to change the language shown on
the display.
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-
guage / Units”key. Select which setting you want
to change using the NISSAN controller.
OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
will change the display to the day
night display. The brightness can then be
OFF button. Pressing the button again
or the
adjusted using the NISSAN controller.
The display brightness can also be adjusted us-
ing the + (brighter) button or the Ϫ (dimmer)
button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the
OFF button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
LHA1147
5. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17)
6. INFO button (P. 4-20)
7. PHONE button**
1. ZOOM OUT button*
2. STATUS button (P. 4-20)
3. DEST button*
8. + (brightness control) button
4. ROUTE button*
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reference symbols:
9.
OFF brightness control button
(P. 4-31)
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel.
10. - (brightness control) button
11. VOICE button*
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen or using the
NISSAN controller.
12. SETTING button (P. 4-24)
13. MAP button*
14.
BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)
15. ZOOM IN button*
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
WHA1210
**For information on the PHONE button, see
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
CONTROLLER
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
2
play using the main directional buttons
(cer-
᭺
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
tain Navigation System functions use the addi-
6
tional directional buttons
᭺
) or the center dial
᭺
3
1
. Then press the ENTER button
the item or perform the action.
to select
᭺
4
The BACK button
has two functions:
᭺
●
Go back to the previous display (cancel).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
If you press the BACK button
during setup,
᭺
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.
●
Finish setup.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving.
4
In some screens, pressing the BACK button
accepts the changes made during setup.
᭺
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
5
For the VOICE button
functions, refer to the
᭺
separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
WARNING
CAUTION
LHA1227
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
driving.
Touch screen operation
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
With this system, the same operations as those
for the NISSAN controller are possible using the
touch screen operation.
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga-
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key
screen. Touch the “BACK”key
previous screen.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
1
on the
᭺
2
to return to the
᭺
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen.
LHA1228
LHA1230
Adjusting the item:
Inputting characters:
1
Touch the “+” key
᭺
2
or the “Ϫ” key
the settings of an item.
to adjust
1
Touch the letter or number key
.
᭺
᭺
There are some options available when inputting
characters.
3
Touch the up arrow
᭺
to scroll up the page one
4
item at a time, or touch the double up arrow
scroll up an entire page.
to
᭺
●
●
●
Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
5
Touch the down arrow
to scroll down the
᭺
Lowercase:
page one item at a time, or touch the double
6
Shows lowercase characters.
down arrow
to scroll down an entire page.
᭺
Space:
Inserts a space.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-
mination, etc.).
3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move up or down on the screen and
select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for the current menu, even if they are on
multiple pages (for example, 1/9).
5. Footer/Information Line:
LHA1229
LHA1231
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle and navigation information for your con-
venience.
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
The information shown on the screen should be a
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
See the following for details.
The STATUS button is used to display system
information. Three different split screens of infor-
mation are available. Press the STATUS button
multiple times to cycle through these screens as
follows:
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort” key).
Audio with Turn Information for Navigation →
Audio with Fuel Economy Information → Audio
with Climate Control Information → Audio with
Turn Information for Navigation
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
●
If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position may con-
tinue to be displayed.
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery
cables, the display might show (**.*).
LHA1232
LHA1233
Fuel economy record
Fuel economy
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key, then select the “Fuel Eco History”
key using the NISSAN controller.
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller to
display Distance to Empty, Average Fuel
Economy and Fuel Economy History.
Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset Fuel
Eco” key using the NISSAN controller.
The average fuel consumption history will be
displayed in a graph form along with the average
fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.
Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the
NISSAN controller.
LHA1234
LHA1235
Changing the maintenance interval
Maintenance items
Select one of the maintenance reminder keys
using the NISSAN controller to display the
screen to change the maintenance interval. You
can choose between Engine Oil, Oil Filter, Tire
and Other Reminder.
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-
nance” key using the NISSAN controller; the
maintenance information will be displayed on the
screen.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con-
troller. Touch the “+” or “-” keys or turn the
NISSAN controller to choose the desired dis-
tance. To accept the changes, press the BACK
button.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.
Map Update
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
Navigation Version
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
Other options
●
●
The “Reset” key is selected.
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
For GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual.
LHA0839
●
The maintenance interval is set again.
Displaying the maintenance notice re-
minder
Where am I?
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to display
the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-
cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-
tor light will illuminate when it is ON.
Traffic Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
following conditions are met:
Weather Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
●
The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1236
LHA1237
WHA1502
HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
Display settings
Select the “Display” key. On the screen above,
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display
Adjustment screen will appear.
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-
tings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the screen on:
●
Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key, or
●
Press the
OFF button and the mes-
sage “resuming display” will appear and the
“Display ON” key will be automatically
turned on (no amber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.
LHA1239
LHA1242
Brightness/contrast:
Display off:
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-
trast to lower or higher.
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
“Display ON” turns off and the message above
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button
on the control panel is operated, the display turns
on for that operation. If one of the control panel
buttons is pressed, the display will not automati-
cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-
erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5
seconds.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Format (24h):
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), the clock format will change from the
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.
Offset (hour):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
hours.
Offset (minute):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
minutes.
Daylight Savings Time:
LHA1240
LHA1241
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out.
Color theme:
Clock
Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color
Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will
appear.
The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller.
Select the key for the desired color. The appear-
ance of the background, arrows and bars will
change for all screens accordingly. You can
choose a black, blue or red color theme.
On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Newfoundland
Hawaii
Alaska
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.
LHA1243
LHA1248
Time Zone:
Others settings
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN con-
troller. Voice recognition, language and units set-
ting screen will be displayed.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
●
●
●
●
●
Pacific
Mountain
Central
Eastern
Atlantic
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within one minute.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
LHA1246
LHA1247
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Comfort settings
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN con-
troller, then select the “Comfort” key. The Com-
fort settings screen will be displayed.
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower
(left). After selecting the item, turn the NISSAN
controller or touch the “+” or “-” key to change
the setting.
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on
or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for
easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel
moves to the previous position.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller. The indicator light (box at the right of
the selected item) alternately turns on and off
each time the item is touched or the ENTER
button is pressed.
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration
of the automatic headlight off timer. After select-
ing the item, turn the NISSAN controller or touch
the “+” or “-” key to change the setting. The
available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150
and 180 seconds.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backward
for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat
moves to the previous position.
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.
LHA1250
LHA1251
Language & Units:
Select Language:
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-
guage & Units” key. Select which setting you
want to change using the NISSAN controller and
selecting either the “Select Language” key or the
“Select Units” key.
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to
change the language shown on the display.
If you select the “Français” key, French language
will be displayed, so please use the French Own-
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual for information regarding these settings.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
Phone settings
For phone settings refer to “Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.
Bluetoothா settings
For Bluetoothா phone settings, refer to
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
LHA1252
LHA1249
Select Units:
Camera settings
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.
Select the “Camera” key. The Camera settings
screen will appear.
For Bluetoothா audio settings, refer to
“Bluetoothா streaming audio” in this section.
When this option is on (indicator light illumi-
nated), predictive course lines will be displayed
when the RearView monitor is displayed on the
screen. See “RearView Monitor” in this section
for more information.
Voice Recognition:
Volume & beeps settings
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
Navigation volume
For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-
mation regarding these settings.
Image viewer settings
For information about these settings, refer to
“Image viewer” in this section.
Phone volume
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMAGE VIEWER (if so equipped)
USING THE IMAGE VIEWER
When a compatible portable storage device is
plugged into the USB jack located in the center
console, compatible image files stored on the
device can be viewed on the control panel de-
vice.
Connecting the portable storage
device
To connect a portable storage device to the sys-
tem so that images stored on it can be viewed,
insert the device into the USB jack located in the
center console.
LHA1253
LHA1254
Switch beeps
Press and hold the
OFF button for more
than two seconds to turn the display off. Press
the button again to turn the display on.
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.
OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
will change the display to the day
night display. The brightness can then be
OFF button. Pressing the button again
or the
adjusted using the NISSAN controller.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select the “Full Screen Display” key and press
the ENTER button to view a full screen version of
the image.
Image requirements:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Image type: JPEG
File extensions: *.jpg, *.jpeg
Maximum resolution: 2048 x 1536
Maximum size: 2 MB
Colors: 32,768 (15-bit)
Maximum file name length: 253 bytes (dis-
play only shows first 8 characters)
LHA1309
LHA1310
●
●
Maximum folders: 500
Viewing images
Viewing images in a slideshow
Maximum images per folder: 1024
To view all of the images on the device in a slide-
show, first enter the full screen mode while viewing
one of the images. The slideshow control buttons
are located on the right side of the screen.
To view an image, press the SETTING button and
then select the “Image Viewer” key with the
NISSAN controller. The Image Viewer screen will
be displayed.
Select the play key
to begin the slideshow.
A list of compatible images on the storage device
is displayed on the left side of the screen, while
the selected image is displayed on the right side
of the screen. To choose a different picture from
the list, use the NISSAN controller to scroll
through the list once the desired image is high-
lighted.
The images shown on the screen will periodically
change at a given interval of time. To skip through
the images without waiting for them to change
automatically, select the
ward or the
key to skip back-
key to skip forward. Select the
stop key
to end the slideshow and return
to the full screen display of the image currently on
the screen.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1311
LHA1312
LHA1313
Slideshow speed:
Slideshow order:
Slideshow settings
To change the interval of time at which images are
changed during a slideshow, select the desired
interval key. The indicator light to the right of the
interval will come on to show that it is selected.
To change the order in which images are dis-
played during a slideshow, select one of the
options.
While in slideshow mode, select the “Settings”
key. The Slideshow Settings screen will be dis-
played. The following settings can be accessed:
If the “Random” key is selected, images will be
displayed in a random order during a slideshow. If
the “Order List” key is selected, images will be
displayed in the order in which they are stored on
the storage device.
If the option “No Auto Change” is chosen, the
slideshow will not change images automatically.
The slideshow can then only be operated using
the manual controls.
To return to the slideshow screen, select the
“Back” key or press the BACK button on the
control panel.
To return to the slideshow screen, select the
“Back” key or press the BACK button on the
control panel.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
view to the rear of the vehicle.
● When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
WARNING
CAUTION
● The rear view camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing up. Always turn and check that it is
safe to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
LHA1196
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
vehicle body line
A
are displayed on the monitor.
᭺
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
Distance guide lines:
● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation.
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
1
●
●
●
●
Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
᭺
2
Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
᭺
● Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
3
Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
᭺
4
Green line : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
᭺
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Vehicle width guide lines
:
᭺
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predicted course line and the actual
course line.
● When backing up the vehicle up a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When backing up
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they ap-
pear. Use the inside mirror or glance
over your shoulder to properly judge
distances to other objects.
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
6
Predicted course lines
:
᭺
Indicate the predicted course when backing up.
The predicted course lines will be displayed on
the monitor when the shift selector is in the R
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is
turned. The predicted course lines will move de-
pending on how much the steering wheel is
turned and will not be displayed while the steer-
ing wheel is in the neutral position.
● If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform the
following procedures:
The vehicle width and predicted course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
– Turn the steering wheel from lock to
lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
● When the steering wheel is turned with
the ignition switch in the ACC position,
the predicted course lines may be dis-
played incorrectly.
WARNING
● Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back
up slowly.
● The distance guide line and the vehicle
width line should be used as a refer-
ence only when the vehicle is on a level
paved surface. The distance viewed on
the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual dis-
tance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
● Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road
grade.
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
D
vehicle width guide lines
parallel to the
᭺
C
parking space
while referring to the pre-
᭺
dicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA1197
LHA1198
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
before parking your vehicle.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course
B
C
lines
enter the parking space
.
᭺
᭺
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
A
the screen
when the shift selector is
᭺
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
the hill is the place
. Note that any object on
᭺
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1199
LHA1200
Backing up on a steep uphill
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A
A
place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place
, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
᭺
᭺
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
the hill is the place
. Note that any object on
᭺
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1201
LHA1202
Backing up near a projecting object
Backing up behind a projecting object
A
The predicted course lines
do not touch the
C
The position
᭺
is shown farther than the position
᭺
᭺
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit
the object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.
B
C
in the display. However, the position
actually at the same distance as the position
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
is
᭺
A
.
᭺
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
the position
if the object projects over the
●
It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed
after the shift selector has been shifted to R
(Reverse) from another position or to an-
other position from R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-
View Monitor screen is displayed com-
pletely.
●
●
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not clearly display
objects. Clean the camera.
᭺
actual backing up course.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor, push the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on and select the “Display”
key. Select one of the items and change the value
by touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the
NISSAN controller.
●
●
●
When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction.
●
●
Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
Do not use wax on the camera window.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-
trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-
ing brake is firmly applied and the engine is not
running.
When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
This is not a malfunction.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
OPERATING TIPS
●
When the shift selector is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the display screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
●
●
The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
●
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTS
LHA1132
LHA1133
LHA1134
Center
Side
Rear
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the
to open the vents or
toward the to close them.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (Type A)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
LHA1139
(fan speed control) dial/OFF but-
(rear window defroster) button
Type A
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
1. Temperature control buttons (driver’s
side)
2. AUTO climate control ON button
9.
ton
10.
3.
4.
(front defroster) button
Air recirculation button
11. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
5. MODE (manual air flow control) button
6. Temperature control buttons (passen-
ger’s side)
7. DUAL (passenger side temperature
control) ON/OFF button
8.
Fresh air intake button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on. To turn off the passenger’s side tempera-
ture control, push the DUAL button.
●
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
Heating (A/C OFF)
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the
automatic mode.
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-
played and A/C indicator will turn off.)
●
When the
front defroster button is
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically
be turned on at outside temperatures above
36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode auto-
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be
displayed.)
2. Operate the temperature control buttons to
set the desired temperature.
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature con-
trol buttons.
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
●
Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
●
●
Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-
tem may not work properly.
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
Turn the
control the fan speed.
fan speed control dial to manually
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Push the
front defroster button on.
Air recirculation
(The indicator light on the button will come
on.)
Push the
air recirculation button to recir-
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
temperature control button. When the DUAL
button or passenger’s side temperature but-
ton is pressed, the DUAL indicator will come
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Operate the temperature control buttons to
set the desired temperature.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
front defrosting and foot out-
Air flow control
Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:
mode or the
let mode.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
Fresh air intake
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
Push the
fresh air intake button to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.
The
on.
indicator light on the button will come
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. To manually control the in-
take air, push the
To return to the automatic control mode, push
and hold the
To turn system off
Press the OFF button.
OPERATING TIPS
LHA1136
air recirculation button.
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor.
air recirculation button or
fresh air intake button
●
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
push and hold the
for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air
recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice, and then the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (Type B)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
LHA1135
(fan speed control) dial/OFF but-
(front defroster) button
Type B
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/
AUTO (automatic) climate control ON
button
8.
ton
9.
2. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
3.
Air recirculation button
Fresh air intake button
4.
5. MODE (manual air flow control) button
6. Temperature control buttons (passen-
ger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side
temperature control) ON/OFF button
7.
(rear window defroster) button
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the passenger’s side temperature
control, push the DUAL button.
●
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(AUTO)
Heating (A/C OFF)
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the
automatic mode.
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-
played and A/C indicator will turn off.)
●
When the
front defroster button is
pushed, the air conditioner will automatically
be turned on at outside temperatures above
36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode auto-
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
1. Push the AUTO button on. (The indicator on
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be
displayed.)
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired temperature.
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
●
Adjust the temperature display to about
75°F (24°C) for normal operation.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
●
●
Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-
tem may not work properly.
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
Turn the
control the fan speed.
fan speed control dial to manually
Not recommended if windows fog up.
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Push the
front defroster button on.
Air recirculation
(The indicator light on the button will come
on.)
Push the
air recirculation button to recir-
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each
temperature control dial. When the DUAL
button or passenger’s side temperature dial
is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The
indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
front defrosting and foot out-
Air flow control
Pushing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:
mode or the
let mode.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
Fresh air intake
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
Push the
fresh air intake button to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment.
The
on.
indicator light on the button will come
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. To manually control the in-
take air, push the
To return to the automatic control mode, push
and hold the
To turn system off
Press the OFF button.
OPERATING TIPS
LHA1136
air recirculation button.
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor.
air recirculation button or
fresh air intake button
●
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
push and hold the
for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air
recirculation and fresh air intake buttons) will
flash twice, and then the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
●
●
When the
button is pushed while on
the maximum fan speed, the speed changes
to the lowest fan speed.
Push the AUTO button to return to the auto-
matic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control switch
Push the
button
or
to raise or
lower the desired temperature for the passenger
compartment. Changing the temperature with
the rear seat controls will activate the DUAL
mode on the main climate controls.
LHA1137
The rear seat passengers can adjust the climate
control system using the climate controls in the
rear armrest panel.
CONTROLS
Automatic control button
Push the AUTO button to activate the automatic
climate control system for the passenger com-
partment.
1. AUTO button
2.
3.
button
switch
Fan control button
For information on canceling the rear seat con-
troller, see “Rear control cancel switch (if so
equipped)”in the “Instruments and controls”sec-
tion.
Push the
button to manually control the fan
speed for the passenger compartment.
●
The fan speed increases each time
the button is pushed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
RADIO
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF
(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Radio reception
WARNING
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா* satellite radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
* XMா is a registered trademark of XM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
Compact disc (CD) player (models
without Navigation System)
CAUTION
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
●
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
CHECK DISC:
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
●
The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
PRESS EJECT:
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
●
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
UNPLAYABLE:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-
anteed to play:
Disc Read Error:
CD/DVD combination player (models
with Navigation System)
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
●
Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD
insert slot. This could damage the
CD/DVD player.
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent
or warped and it is free of scratches.
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate
the player completely.
● Recordable compact discs (DVD R,
DVD R DL)
Please Eject Disc:
This error may be due to the tempera-
ture inside the player getting too high.
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
persists, consult your local dealership.
● Rewritable
compact
discs
(DVD RW, DVD RW DL)
●
Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as
they may cause the CD/DVD player to
malfunction.
●
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compart-
ment temperature is extremely high.
Decrease the temperature before use.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
● CDs/DVDs that are not round
● CDs/DVDs with a paper label
Unplayable File:
● The file may be copy protected.
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
logo on the disc or packaging.
● CDs/DVDs
that
are
warped,
● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A
or DIVX type.
scratched, or have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-
bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.
Region Invalid
●
●
Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
sunlight.
● The DVD is not for region 1 or all
regions.
●
If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of
the following messages will be dis-
played.
CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,
dirty, scratched, covered with finger-
prints, or that have pinholes may not
work properly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD
entertainment system. (The region
A
●
This copyright protected technology
cannot be used without a permit from
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited
to personal use, etc., as long as the
permit from Macrovision Corporation
is not issued.
code
is displayed as a small sym-
᭺
bol printed on the top of the DVD
B
.) This vehicle-installed DVD
᭺
player cannot play DVDs with a re-
gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.
●
●
●
Modifying or disassembling is prohib-
ited.
Dolby digital is manufactured under li-
cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
Dolby and the double D mark “
”
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,
Inc.
●
DTS and DTS Digital Surround “
”
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPodா players. There
are some USB devices which may not be sup-
ported with this system.
LHA0484
Copyright and trademark
●
The technology protected by the U.S.
patent and other intellectual property
●
Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation and other right holders is
adopted for this system.
●
Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player com-
pletely.
●
●
●
Do not connect the USB device if the con-
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
●
If you are using an iPodா (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPodா resetting itself.
Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPodா. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
●
●
The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
Bluetoothா streaming audio (if so
equipped)
If the iPodா automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
●
Some Bluetoothா audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
●
It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
nection between a compatible Bluetoothா
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetoothா
module before using the Bluetoothா audio.
●
●
Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPodா.
●
●
Prepare the USB device by yourself be-
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.
The iPodா nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPodா.
●
●
Operating procedure of the Bluetoothா au-
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device be-
fore using it with this system.
The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
●
●
Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
●
●
The iPodா nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
The Bluetoothா audio may be stopped under
the following conditions:
Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English lan-
guage characters with USB devices.
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPodா
nano (2nd generation).
● Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Do not place the Bluetoothா audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetoothா module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.
Explanation of terms:
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●
●
While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
This system supports the Bluetoothா Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
* Windowsா, Windows Mediaா and Windows
Vistaா are registered trademarks and trademarks
in the United States of America and other coun-
tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
CD or USB with Compressed Audio
Files (models without Navigation
System)
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
The file types supported by this system are MP3
and WMA.
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
WHA1078
Playback order chart
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB 2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vistaா operating system-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3
WMA*1
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2
Supported
versions
Version
WMA7, WMA8
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
64 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 LE), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 BE), 05: UNI-
CODE (UTF-8)
Displayable character codes*3
*1 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*2 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3” or “.WMA” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
AAC/M4A
—
Advanced Audio Coding
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
CD, DVD or USB with Compressed
Audio Files (models with Navigation
System)
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
The file types supported by this system are MP3,
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.
●
●
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by
Sony.
Explanation of terms:
* Windowsா, Windows Mediaா and Windows
Vistaா are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by ap-
proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-
tible loss in quality. The compression re-
duces certain parts of sound that seem in-
audible to most people.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB
device with compressed audio files is as illus-
trated.
●
The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
●
●
If there is a file in the top level of the
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
WHA1374
Playback order chart
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specification chart:
Supported media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, USB 2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vistaா operating system-based computer) are not
supported.
Supported file systems
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA*2
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
versions*1
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
32 kHz - 48 kHz
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
AAC
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
8 kHz - 96 kHz
16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ATRAC
Version
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
Text character number limitation
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
Displayable character codes*3
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-
ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
before the music starts
playing.
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compressed Video Files (models with
Navigation System)
Explanation of terms:
●
DivX – DivX refers to the DivXா codec
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-
sion of video based on MPEG-4.
●
AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is standard file format originated by Mi-
crosoft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can
be saved into the .avi file format for playback
on this system if it meets the requirements
stated in the table in this section. However,
all .avi files are not playable on this system
since different encodings can be used other
than the DivXா codec.
●
●
ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:
Media
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,
DVD R, DVD RW, DVD RW
DL
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
File Systems
USB Memory
.divx, .avi
FAT16, FAT32
Video Codecs
Audio Codecs
Video Codec
Audio Codec
Maximum Average
Maximum Peak
Minimum
DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
File Types
Bit Rates
Resolution
.asf
ISO-MPEG4
G.726
.divx, .avi
.divx, .avi
.asf
4 Mbps
8 Mbps
32 x 32
Maximum
720 x 480
32 x 32
Minimum
Maximum
720 x 576
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. SEEK/CAT button
10. DISC button
11. RPT/RDM button
12. SCAN button
13. AM·FM button
14. DISP/CLOCK button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) CHANGER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
LHA1130
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
1.
5. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control
CD eject button
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance, SSV
(if so equipped), and Beep)
6. AUX IN jack
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
3. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
4. LOAD CD button
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
7. AUX button
8. TRACK button
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Fade,
Balance and Beep):
Adjusting the time
●
●
●
●
Track number displays the track number se-
lected on the disc.
1. Push and hold the DISP/CLOCK button for
more than 2 seconds until the display shows
“Hour Adjust”.
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Track time displays the amount of time the
track has played.
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep
2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
hour.
Album title displays the title of the CD being
played.
ON/OFF → Bass
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER
knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
level. You can also use the TUNE/FOLDER knob
to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Fade adjusts
the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the
right and left speakers.
3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again; the
display will show “Minute Adjust”.
Song title displays the title of the selected
CD track.
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the
minutes.
MP3 display mode
To change the text displayed when listening to a
CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the
DISP/CLOCK button. The DISP/CLOCK button
will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc
number, Track number and Folder number ←→
Folder title ←→ Song title ←→ Artist name ←→
Album title.
5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit
the clock set mode.
Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to return to
the regular clock display. If no action is taken, the
display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds.
To change the Beep to ON or OFF, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob left or right. This will enable
or disable the beep sound heard during menu
selection.
●
●
●
Disc number displays the number of the
current disc playing.
If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will
not indicate the correct time.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-
cally reappear after about five seconds.
Track number displays the number of the
track playing on the selected disc.
Readjust the time.
CD display mode
Folder number displays the number of the
current folder on the MP3 CD.
To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP/CLOCK button. The
DISP/CLOCK button will allow you to scroll
through CD text as follows: Track number and
Track time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title.
Clock set
●
●
Folder title displays the title of the folder.
The clock displays the time when the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
Song title displays the title of the song play-
ing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Artist name displays the name of the artist of
the song playing.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons:
Album title displays the title of the album of
the song playing.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
Press the SEEK/CAT
button or the
TRACK button to tune from high to low or
low to high frequencies and stop at the next
broadcasting station.
FM/AM radio operation
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the AM·FM button will change the band
as follows:
SCAN tuning:
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
SCAN button again during this 5-second period
will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
the next station.
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the AM·FM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the LOAD button, then press
one of the CD insert (1 – 6) slots. Insert the
compact disc into the slot with the label side
facing up. The compact disc will be guided auto-
matically into the slot and start playing.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
If a compact disc is playing when the AM·FM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
If the system has been turned off while a compact
disc was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob will start the compact disc.
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
LOAD button:
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the
LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.
pressed. (When the last track on the compact
disc is skipped through, the first track will be
played.)
CD:
All Disc Repeat → 1 Disc Repeat → 1 Track
Repeat → All Disc Random → 1 Disc Random →
All Disc Repeat
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Rewind·Fast Forward)
buttons:
MP3/WMA CD:
DISC button:
All Disc Repeat → 1 Disc Repeat → 1 Folder
Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → All Disc Random →
1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → All Disc
Repeat
When the DISC button is pressed with the sys-
tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system
will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
(rewind)
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
When the DISC button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio
will automatically be turned off and the compact
disc will start to play.
All Disc Repeat: All discs loaded will be re-
peated.
1 Disc Repeat: The disc that is currently playing
will be repeated.
1 Track Repeat: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated.
1 Folder Repeat: The folder that is currently being
accessed will be repeated.
All Disc Random: All discs loaded will be played
in a mixed order.
1 Disc Random: The tracks on the disc that is
currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
1 Folder Random: The tracks in the folder that is
currently being accessed will be played in a
mixed order.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons:
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward
or backward through available folders.
When the SEEK/CAT
button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
disc will go back the number of times the button
is pressed.
CD select buttons:
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
CD select button (1 – 6).
RPT/RDM button:
When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When the TRACK
button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track will
start to play from its beginning. Press several
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
will advance the number of times the button is
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN button:
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button
to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on
the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again
during this 10 second period stops the scan and
the CD remains on that track.
AUX IN jack
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD changer.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-
dard analog audio input, such as from a portable
cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
CD EJECT:
Current/Selected disc:
●
Press the
button, then press the slot
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
reload.
All discs:
●
Press and hold the
button for more
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
within 15 seconds or the
button is
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
When this button is pressed while a compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
WHA1364
1.
6. TRACK button
7. SEEK/CAT button
8. DISC button
9. RPT/RDM button
10. SCAN button
11. FM·AM button
CD eject button
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
3. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
4. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance)
5. AUX button*
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-
ance and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
LHA1304
LHA1314
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”in
this section.
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key
using the NISSAN controller; the audio settings
screen will be displayed. Select the “–”key or “+”
key to change the SSV.
Clock operation
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
For additional information on setting the clock,
see “Adjusting the time” in this section.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display
screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
WHA0949
WHA0950
●
●
●
●
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
CD/MP3 display mode
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,
certain text might be able to be displayed (when
CD encoded with text is being used).
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur-
rently playing.
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is
encoded, the following text might be able to be
displayed by selecting the “Text” key:
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
Track displays the name of the song on the
CD currently playing.
●
●
●
Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
XM band select:
Some of this text or modes might not display
while playing a regular CD. Select the “Menu”key
with the NISSAN controller, then select the “Text”
key to display the text for the CD.
File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
follows:
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.
USB → XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → AUX → USB
(satellite, if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
SCAN tuning:
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
SCAN button again during this five second pe-
riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
the next station.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
Radio data system (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XMா satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen stations can be set for the XM
band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
RDS can display:
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button. Or choose
the satellite band SAT1 or SAT2 using the
AUX button.
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
When the “Text”key is selected with the NISSAN
controller on the display while the radio is playing,
additional information is displayed on the screen.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons:
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
Press the SEEK/CAT
TRACK button to tune from high to low or
low to high frequencies and stop at the next
broadcasting station.
button or the
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and
insert the compact disc into the slot with the label
side facing up. The compact disc will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
vance the number of times the button is pressed.
(When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped through, the first track will be played.)
CD with compressed audio files:
Repeat All → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat
→ 1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → Re-
peat All
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks when a CD is playing.
Repeat All: Normal play mode. All tracks will
constantly play in sequential order.
1 Folder Repeat: The folder that is currently being
accessed will be repeated.
1 Track Repeat: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated.
1 Disc Random: The tracks on the disc that is
currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
1 Folder Random: The tracks in the folder that is
currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Rewind and Fast
DISC button:
When the DISC button is pressed with the sys-
tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system
will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
(rewind)
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
When the DISC button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio
will automatically be turned off and the compact
disc will start to play.
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
CD EJECT button:
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons:
TUNE/FOLDER knob
When the
button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward
or backward through available folders.
When the SEEK/CAT
button is pressed
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
disc will go back the number of times the button
is pressed.
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.
RPT/RDM button:
When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When the TRACK
button is pressed while
CD:
a compact disc is playing, the next track will start
to play from its beginning. Press several times to
skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-
Repeat All → 1 Track Repeat → 1 Disc Random
→ Repeat All
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the AUX button until the
AUX mode appears in the display. The output
from the device will be played through the display
(when the vehicle is in the (P) Park position and
the parking brake engaged) and audio system.
LHA1140
LHA1367
AUX settings
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks
Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con-
troller and press the ENTER button.
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
1
center console
. NTSC compatible devices
᭺
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary input jacks.
Choose one of the display modes by selecting
the “
” key or the “
” key:
●
●
●
Normal
Wide
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
tification purposes:
Cinema
●
●
●
Red – right channel audio input
White – left channel audio input
Yellow – video input
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the SAT button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XMா satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD
PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
WHA1365
1.
6. TRACK button
7. SEEK/CAT button
8. SAT* button
9. RPT/RDM button
10. SCAN button
11. FM·AM button
CD eject button
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
3. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
4. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance)
5. DISC·AUX button
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-
ance and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
LHA1236
LHA1256
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller”in
this section.
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key
using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-
TER button; the audio settings screen will be
displayed. Select the “–”key or “+”key to change
the SSV.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.
Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Some of this text might not display while playing a
regular CD.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
LHA1257
LHA1258
Display album cover art:
CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio
files
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
When an audio source encoded with album
cover art is played, the album cover art can be
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.
When the feature is activated, the amber indica-
tor next to the word ON will illuminate.
While listening to a CD or compressed audio
files, certain text might be able to be displayed
(when CD encoded with text is being used).
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
Depending on how the CD or compressed audio
files are encoded, the following text might be
displayed:
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
●
Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
●
File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-
cally change from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
To manually tune the radio, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
SAT radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so
equipped).
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
tuning buttons:
SAT band select:
Pressing the SAT button will change the band as
follows:
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the SAT button.
For AM or FM:
Press the SEEK/CAT
button or the
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
TRACK button to tune from high to low or
low to high frequencies and stop at the next
broadcasting station.
equipped)
When the SAT button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and the sound is briefly muted.
For XM:
Press the SEEK/CAT
button or the
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
TRACK button to go to the first channel of
the previous or next category.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
*When the SAT button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
SCAN button again during this five second pe-
riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
the next station.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
If a compact disc is playing when the SAT button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
List (AM and FM)
Select the “List” key using the NISSAN controller
or touchscreen to see a list of the presets in the
AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a
favorite artist or song is playing on XM.
The audio system must be playing XM
radio for this feature to work.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and
insert the compact disc into the slot with the label
side facing up. The compact disc will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
– Delete a favorite artist or song.
●
●
Categories – Displays a category list for XM
radio. Select a category to select the first
channel for that category.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering
the channel number.
Radio data system (RDS):
DISC·AUX button:
LHA1375
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
Menu (XM, if so equipped)
Select the “Menu”key using the NISSAN control-
ler or touchscreen to see a list of options:
●
Preset List – Displays the list of presets.
Press and hold the touchscreen or ENTER
button on the NISSAN controller to save a
preset.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
RDS can display:
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
●
●
Customize Channel List – deselect chan-
nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER
knob.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons:
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
Favorite Artist & Songs
●
Station specific text.
When the SEEK/CAT
button is pressed
– Tags the current artist or song playing on
XM as a favorite.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
text information is automatically displayed.
while a compact disc is playing, the track being
played returns to its beginning. Press several
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
disc will go back the number of times the button
is pressed.
When the TRACK
button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track will
start to play from its beginning. Press several
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
will advance the number of times the button is
pressed. (When the last track on the compact
disc is skipped through, the first track will be
played.)
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks when a CD is being played.
LHA1258
LHA1259
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Rewind and Fast
CD menu
●
Play Mode
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type
of CD being played, the following options may be
available:
This option allows you to alter the play pattern of
the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to
apply. The modes change the play pattern as
follows:
Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
(rewind)
1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are
played randomly.
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD
only) - the current folder is repeated.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
While playing a CD with compressed audio files,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play
the next or previous folder.
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD
only) - tracks from the current folder are played
randomly.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1262
LHA1260
LHA1261
Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential
order until stopped.
●
Folder List
●
Track List
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from
that folder.
The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a track name to begin playing that track.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the
button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the compact disc
will eject and the system will turn off.
LHA1267
LHA1140
●
●
Title Text Priority
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks
Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,
Recording Quality
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
1
center console
. NTSC compatible devices
᭺
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary input jacks.
For more information about these options, see
“Music Box™ Hard-Drive Audio System with
Navigation System” in this section.
CD EJECT button:
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
tification purposes:
When the
button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
●
●
●
Red – right channel audio input
White – left channel audio input
Yellow – video input
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the
display. The output from the device will be played
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)
Park position and the parking brake engaged)
and audio system.
WHA1393
LHA1394
AUX settings
Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con-
troller.
The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,
Medium or High.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)
PLAYER OPERATION (models with
Navigation System)
CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
uids may cause the system to
malfunction.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie
is played. To view movies on the front display,
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake.
● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee com-
plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD
formats.
LHA1376
Playing a DVD
WARNING
DISC-AUX button
● The driver must not attempt to operate
the DVD system or wear the head-
phones while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while
watching the images.
Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode
is active on the display.
● Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-
matically.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is
playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-
matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,
press the DISC-AUX button.
DVD settings
NEXT/PREVIOUS
CHAPTER:
key to skip the chapter(s) of the
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
Select the
disc forward. Select the
key to skip the
●
Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Displays the operation keys for the specific
DVD menu.
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters
will advance forward or backward the number of
times the respective key is touched or selected
with the NISSAN controller.
DVD operation keys
When the DVD is playing without the operation
screen being shown, you may use the touch-
screen to select items from the displayed video.
You may also use the NISSAN controller to select
an item from the displayed video. When the op-
eration screen is being shown, use the NISSAN
controller or the touchscreen to select an item
from the displayed menus.
– Select the directional keys to move the
cursor on the DVD menu.
CM SKIP:
– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected
menu item.
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-
– Select the “Move” key to move the loca-
tion of the operation keys on the screen.
VR. Select the
or
key to fast forward
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM
settings. For more information, see “DVD set-
tings” in this section.
– Select the “Back” key to return to the
previous menu screen.
PAUSE:
Next/Prev:
– Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-
tion keys.
Select the
sume playing the DVD, use the
key to pause the DVD. To re-
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the
“+”or “-”key to advance or rewind the still image.
The still image will advance or rewind the number
of times the key is touched or selected with the
NISSAN controller.
key.
●
●
Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)
PLAY:
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions at-
tached to the disc.
Select the
key to start playing the DVD or
Top Menu:
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.
Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each
disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-
tions attached to the disc.
STOP:
Select the
key to stop playing the DVD.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)
The scene with the specified group will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
●
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
●
●
●
Audio
Choose the preferred language for the au-
dio.
DVD menus are automatically configured
and the contents will be played directly
when the “Menu Skip”key is turned on. Note
that some discs may not be played directly
even if this item is turned on.
Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred language for the sub-
titles.
10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
CD-DA, DVD-VR)
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track
will be played.
●
●
●
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
DVD-VR)
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” mode.
Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the
setting time for CM backward and forward
operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose
a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.
●
●
●
Title List (DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred title from the list.
●
●
Select No. (VIDEO CD)
DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Select the “Select No.” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified scene will be played.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode.
PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.
Angle (DVD-VIDEO)
DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number cor-
responding to the preferred language and
select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
language will be changed to the one speci-
fied.
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle
can be switched to another one. Select the
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to
change the angle.
●
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)
When this item is turned on, an angle mark
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if
the scene can be seen from a different angle.
●
Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen by
selecting the preferred adjustment items.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio file operation
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons:
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
while an au-
SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the TRACK button
file on the USB device is playing to advance one
track. Press the TRACK button several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
while an audio
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Reverse or Fast Forward)
buttons:
WHA1366
USB INTERFACE (models without
Folder selection:
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the NISSAN con-
troller.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
button or TRACK (fast forward) button for
(rewind)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB
device is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file re-
turns to normal play speed.
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
RPT/RDM button:
1
sole. Open the protective cover
on the USB
᭺
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
USB memory is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Repeat All → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat
→ All Random → 1 Folder Random → Repeat All
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When there are both audio and movie files in the
USB memory, the mode select screen is dis-
played. Use the touchscreen or the NISSAN con-
troller to select the preferred type of file. When
there is only type of file in the USB memory, that
audio or movie operation screen is displayed and
starts to play.
When you play a file with limited playing time, the
confirmation screen will be displayed before
starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time
and select “yes” to start playing.
Audio file operation
DISC-AUX button:
WHA1366
LHA1378
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the DISC-AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio
source is playing and a USB memory device is
inserted, press the DISC-AUX button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
1
sole. Open the protective cover
on the USB
᭺
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on
the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen.
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Reverse or Fast Forward)
buttons:
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the NISSAN con-
troller.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT
(rewind)
button or TRACK
(fast forward) button for
RPT/RDM button:
1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB
device is playing to reverse or fast forward the
track being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file re-
turns to normal play speed.
When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
USB memory is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
Normal → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →
All Random → 1 Folder Random → Normal
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
buttons:
LHA1294
Menu:
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following that are dis-
played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the
following information for each item.
Press the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
while an au-
SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip
backward several tracks.
●
Movie Playback
Switch to the movie playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains movie files.
The shift selector must be in Park (P) with
the parking brake engaged to watch movies
from a USB device.
Press the TRACK button
file on the USB device is playing to advance one
track. Press the TRACK button several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
while an audio
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Folder List/Track List
Operation keys:
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen and enables you to switch to the
movie playback mode.
To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the display screen.
●
Pause:
Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode using the
NISSAN controller or the touchscreen.
Select the
key to pause the movie file.
To resume playing the movie file, use
the
key.
●
Play:
Select the
key to start playing the
LHA1379
movie file or resume the movie file if it has
been paused.
Movie file operation
●
●
Stop:
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the USB
memory while watching the images.
Select the
movie file.
key to stop playing the
DISC-AUX button:
Next Chapter/Fast Forward:
When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on. If another audio source is
playing and the USB memory is inserted, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
Select the
key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-
vance the number of times the key is se-
lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-
ward the chapter.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
10 Key Search
●
Previous Chapter/Rewind:
Select the key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
back the number of times the key is selected.
Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-
ter.
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and the specified file or
folder will be played.
●
●
Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen.
DRC
List:
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
screen to display the file list.
●
●
Audio
LHA1380
Choose the preferred language of the audio.
Settings:
Subtitle
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
Choose the preferred language of the sub-
titles.
●
Display Mode
●
Audio File Playback
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.
Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains audio files.
●
Play Mode
Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track
Repeat” play modes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodா.
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
WHA1366
LHA1395
The following models are compatible:
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION
Audio main operation
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா Classic - 1st through 6th generation
iPodா Mini - 1st and 2nd generation
iPodா Nano - 1st through 3rd generation
iPodா Touch - 1st generation
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPodா mode.
Connecting iPodா
If the system has been turned off while the iPodா
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPodா.
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
1
iPhoneா - 1st generation
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
AUX button:
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPodா connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPodா is connected, press the AUX button re-
peatedly until the center display changes to the
iPodா mode.
tive cover
on the USB jack in the center
᭺
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
●
Albums
Artists
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
●
●
MENU: returns to the previous screen.
: plays/pauses the music selected.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
LHA1396
WHA1366
When the
SEEK/CAT button or
Interface:
iPodா* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPodா is playing, the next track or
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPodா in-
terface. Use the NISSAN controller and the
BACK button to play the iPodா with your favorite
settings.
the beginning of the current track on the iPodா equipped)
will be played.
Connecting iPodா
When the
SEEK/CAT button or
To connect an iPodா to the vehicle so that the
iPodா can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
1
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPodா is playing, the iPodா will
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPodா will return to the
normal play speed.
The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.
tive cover
on the USB jack in the center
᭺
●
●
●
Playlists
Podcasts
Songs
console. Then connect the iPodா-specific end of
the cable to the iPodா and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPodா
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
* Some features of this iPodா may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPodா firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPodா can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPodா from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPodா.
* iPodா is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
LHA1397
The following models are compatible:
Audio main operation
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
iPodா 5th Generation version 1.2.1
iPodா Classic - version 1.1.1
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPodா mode.
iPodா Touch - version 2.0.0*
If the system has been turned off while the iPodா
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPodா.
iPodா Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
iPodா Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
iPodா Nano - 3rd generation version 1.1
iPodா Nano - 4thgeneration version 1.0.2
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISC·AUX button:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Albums
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPodா connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
the iPodா is connected, press the DISC·AUX
button repeatedly until the center display
changes to the iPodா mode.
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
●
●
MENU: returns to the previous screen.
: plays/pauses the music selected.
LHA1398
Interface:
The interface for iPodா operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPodா in-
terface. Use the NISSAN controller and the
BACK button to play the iPodா with your favorite
settings. The touchscreen can also be used to
control your favorite settings.
The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.
●
●
●
Now Playing
Playlists
Artists
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the
SEEK/CAT button or
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPodா is playing, the iPodா will
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPodா will return to the
normal play speed.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks when the iPodா is playing.
LHA1315
LHA1399
Scrolling menus:
Play mode:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-
ing, perform one of the following:
While the iPodா is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to display the iPodா menu. Touch the “Play
Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and
adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-
books. For further information about each item,
see the iPodா Owner’s Manual.
●
●
Turn the NISSAN controller quickly.
Press and hold the up/down directional ar-
rows on the NISSAN controller.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
●
Touch and hold the page up/down arrows
on the touchscreen.
When the
SEEK/CAT button or
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPodா is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the iPodா
will be played.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of
the following:
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard drive.
●
●
●
Press the ENTER button on the NISSAN
controller.
NOTE:
Push the ENTER switch on the steering
wheel.
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.
MUSIC BOX™ HARD DRIVE AUDIO
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can
store songs from CDs being played. The system
has an 800 megabyte (MB) storage capacity and
can record up to 24 hours (approximately 360
songs).
WHA1368
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Com-
pact Disc (CD) player operation” in this sec-
tion.
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system:
2. Select the “REC” key with the NISSAN con-
troller. “REC Track” appears on the screen.
●
●
CDs without MP3/WMA files.
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
NOTE:
●
●
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-
fication in CD-Extras.
●
The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “REC” key is
selected.
First session of multisession disc.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
●
●
There is not enough space in the Music Box.
The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 99.
●
The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 2,000.
Automatic recording:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted and
any previous CD “converting” is finished. For
more information, see “Music Box settings”in this
section.
WHA0956
WHA1369
●
●
The recording process can be stopped at
any time. All tracks that were played before
the CD was stopped are stored.
Playing recorded songs
Stopping recording:
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
To stop the recording, select the “Stop REC” key
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio
system is turned off or the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the recording also
stops.
Individual tracks can be deleted from the
Music Box after the CD is recorded.
●
Press the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” in this section.
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For
title acquisition from the hard-disk drive, music
recognition technology and related data are pro-
vided by Gracenoteா.
●
Press the DISC button repeatedly until the
center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the
behind the track number.
symbol is displayed
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping playback:
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-
ler” in this section.
The system stops playing when:
●
Another mode (radio, CD, USB memory,
iPodா or AUX) is selected.
Play mode selection:
To change to another album or artist, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob.
●
●
The audio system is turned off.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
RPT/RDM button:
Press the RPT/RDM button while a track is play-
ing to change the play pattern as follows:
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
Repeat All → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat
Press the
SEEK/CAT button while a track
→ All Random→ 1 Folder Random → Repeat All
is playing to return to the beginning of the current
track. Press the
TRACK button while a
WHA1370
track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next
track.
Music Box menu
There are some options available during play-
back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
If you press and hold the
wind) button or the
button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds;
the track will play while rewinding or fast forward-
SEEK/CAT (re-
TRACK (fast forward)
ing. When the
SEEK/CAT (rewind) button
●
Music Library
or the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-
leased, the track will return to the normal playing
speed.
There are some options available during
playback. Select one of the following op-
tions that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks.
●
Albums
Play tracks in each album. The albums are
stored in alphabetical order.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA1371
WHA1372
WHA1373
●
Artists
●
Transfer Titles from USB
Music Box settings
Play tracks by an artist whose music is cur-
rently being played. The artists are stored in
alphabetical order.
Update the in-vehicle Gracenoteா Database
using a USB memory device. Search the title
from information acquired on the Internet.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for
details.
To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system
to your preferred settings, select the “Menu” key
with the NISSAN controller during playback.
Then select the “Music Box Settings”key with the
NISSAN controller.
●
●
Genres
Play tracks by genre by selecting from the
displayed list.
●
●
Transfer Missing Titles to USB
Transfer the information of an album re-
corded without titles to the USB memory.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for
details.
●
Music Box Used/Free Space:
All Songs
Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The
tracks are stored in alphabetical order.
Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved
Track” and “Remaining Time” is displayed.
●
Delete Songs from the Music Box:
Delete the current song, selected songs or
albums by choosing from the list, or all
songs/albums in the Music Box.
Update Missing Titles
Search the title using the database in the
hard-disk.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Automatic Recording:
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related informa-
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system automatically
starts recording when a CD is inserted.
●
●
Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-
vice to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.
Gracenote Database Version:
The version of the built-in Gracenoteா Data-
base is displayed.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
Gracenoteா
NOTE:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
●
The information contained in the
Gracenoteா Database is not fully guaran-
teed.
EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE
DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-
TED HEREIN.
●
The service of the Gracenoteா Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote.
NOTE:
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
MUSIC BOX™ HARD DRIVE AUDIO
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can
store songs from CDs being played. The system
has a 9.3 gigabyte (GB) storage capacity and
can record up to 200 hours (approximately 2,900
songs).
Copyright:
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
●
●
CDs without compressed audio files.
Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
●
●
Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-
fication in CD-Extras.
First session of multisession disc.
Extreme temperature conditions [below Ϫ4°F
(Ϫ20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard drive.
#6,061,680;
#6,230,192,
#6,154,773,
#6,230,207,
#6,161,132,
#6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For
title acquisition from the hard drive, music recog-
nition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenoteா.
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
key on the screen or use the NISSAN controller.
The track name and album title are displayed on
the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the
symbol is displayed
behind the track number.
LHA1263
LHA1282
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
●
Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-
lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard
drive.
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Com-
pact Disc (CD) player operation” in this sec-
tion.
●
●
There is not enough space in the hard drive.
●
●
The fast forward and rewind features are
disabled while the CD is recording.
The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
The recording process can be stopped at
any time. All tracks that were played before
the CD was stopped are stored.
2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD ap-
pears on the screen.
●
The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
●
●
Individual tracks can be deleted from the
hard drive after the CD is recorded.
NOTE:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For
more information, see “Music Box settings”in this
section.
●
The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”
key is selected.
The system records faster than it plays.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping recording:
●
Give voice commands.
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition system” in this section.
To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” key
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio
system is turned off or the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the recording also
stops.
Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:
●
Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetoothா
Audio or AUX) is selected.
●
●
The audio system is turned off.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
LHA1283
Press the
SEEK/CAT button while a track
is playing to return to the beginning of the current
TRACK button while a
track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next
track.
Playing recorded songs
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
track. Press the
●
Press the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
If you press and hold the
wind) button or the
SEEK/CAT (re-
TRACK (fast forward)
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” in this section.
button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds;
the track will play while rewinding or fast forward-
SEEK/CAT (rewind) button
or the TRACK (fast forward) button is re-
●
Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
ing. When the
leased, the track will return to the normal playing
speed.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks.
For more information on how to use the NISSAN
controller, see “How to use the NISSAN control-
ler” in this section.
TUNE/FOLDER knob:
The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album to
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,
the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track in-
stead of the album. The upper right corner of the
screen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob is
changing by track or album.
LHA1284
LHA1285
Music Box menu
There are some options available during play-
back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
●
Now Playing
Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box
system. Touch the name of the track to begin
playing that track.
●
Music Library
Lists the songs in the Music Library. Tracks
can be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Edit Name - changes the name of the
playlist.
– Delete Songs - deletes songs from the
playlist.
LHA1286
LHA1287
●
My Playlists
Displays the playlists stored in the system.
Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist to
perform the following operations for that
playlist:
– Add Current Song - adds the song cur-
rently playing to the playlist.
– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to the
playlist by album.
– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to the
playlist by artist.
– Edit Song Order - edits the order of the
songs in the playlist.
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Up-
date Gracenote from HDD” options can be used
to update the titles of songs in the Music Library.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailed
instructions on how to update the Gracenote
database.
LHA1288
LHA1289
●
Play Mode
●
Edit Music Information
Alters the play mode of the playlist. Touch
the key of the mode you wish to apply. The
modes change the play pattern as follows:
Edits the information of the songs in the
Music Library.
– Edit Information of Current Song
– Edit Information by Album
– Normal - no play pattern is applied.
– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the current
album are repeated.
– Update Gracenote from USB Device
– Transfer Missing Titles to USB
– Update Gracenote from HDD
– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is re-
peated.
– 1 Album Random - the songs in the cur-
rent album are played randomly.
– All Random - all songs are played ran-
domly.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1290
LHA1291
LHA1292
●
●
Delete Songs from Music Box:
Delete music data stored on the hard drive.
Music Box settings
To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system
to your preferred settings, touch the “Menu” key
during playback, then touch the “Music Box Set-
tings” key.
Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
●
●
Music Box Used/Free Space:
Displays the number of tracks and albums
stored on the hard drive. The percentage of
hard drive space taken up and the amount of
remaining recording time left are also shown.
Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box Hard Drive audio system automatically
starts recording when a CD is inserted.
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
CDDB Version:
Shows the version of CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base).
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-
vice to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
Gracenoteா
NOTE:
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
●
The information contained in the
Gracenoteா Database is not fully guaran-
teed.
EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE
DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-
TED HEREIN.
●
The service of the Gracenoteா Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenoteா MusicID™ Terms of Use
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related informa-
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
BLUETOOTHா STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetoothா audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenoteா. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
LHA1316
Connecting Bluetoothா audio
To connect your Bluetoothா audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
#6,061,680;
#6,230,192,
#6,154,773,
#6,230,207,
#6,161,132,
#6,240,459,
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1317
LHA1351
LHA1299
4. A screen will appear asking if you are con-
necting the device to use with the hands-
free phone system. Select the “No” key.
5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed
by your Bluetoothா audio device to com-
plete the connection process. See the
Bluetoothா audio device’s owner’s manual
for more information.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetoothா audio mode, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetoothா audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetoothா audio are dis-
played on the screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1316
LHA1296
LHA1297
4. Select the “Audio Player” key.
5. A list of the connected Bluetoothா audio
players is displayed. Select the name of the
device you wish to edit.
Bluetoothா audio settings
To adjust the Bluetoothா audio settings, follow
the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA1298
LHA0049
6. The Device Name and Device Address are
displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”
key to make this device the active
Bluetoothா audio player. Select the “Edit”
key to edit the details of the player, such as
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to
delete the device.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
Models without Navigation System:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → USB* (if so
equipped) → CD/DVD* → Music Box** (if so
equipped) → AUX* → AM.
Models with Navigation System:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD*→
Music Box** → USB/iPodா* → Bluetoothா Au-
dio* → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
LHA1144
WHA1145
Type A
Type B
1. Power on and SOURCE select switch
2. Tuning switch
1. Power on and SOURCE select switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3. Volume control switch
** This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box system.
3. Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iPodா (if so equipped):
USB (if so equipped):
Menu control
switch/ENTER button
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
While the display is showing a MAP, STATUS or
Audio screen, tilt the Menu Control switch up-
ward or downward to select a station, track, CD
or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds pro-
vides a different function than a tilting up/down
for less than 1.5 seconds.
●
Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
CD:
Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Music Box (if so equipped):
●
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
AM and FM:
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the album (folder)
number (if playing compressed audio files).
Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
DVD (if so equipped):
●
Press the ENTER button to show the Music
Box Menu.
Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.
●
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
Bluetoothா Audio (if so equipped):
XM (if so equipped):
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the title number.
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●
●
●
Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
Press the ENTER button to select an item
from the DVD display.
AUX:
Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
●
Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
When the transparent operation menu ap-
pears, the switch will control the menu.
Menu.
Press the ENTER button to show the XM
Menu.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Models with Navigation System:
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if so
equipped)
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3 →
CD/DVD* → Music Box** → USB/iPodா* →
Bluetoothா Audio → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
The audio system can also be operated using the
rear controls.
For information on canceling the rear seat con-
troller, see “Rear control cancel switch (if so
equipped)”in the “Instruments and controls”sec-
tion.
** This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box system.
TUNE/TRACK control switch:
ON/OFF button:
AM/FM:
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the ON/OFF button to turn the
audio system on or off.
●
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
to select the next or previous preset station.
Push and hold the or side of
the switch to select the next or previous
station.
VOL (volume) control switch:
Push the
side of the switch to increase the
volume or push the
decrease the volume.
side of the switch to
XM:
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
SRC (source) button:
to select the next or previous preset station.
LHA1142
Press the SRC button to change the audio mode
as follows:
●
Push and hold the or side of
the switch to select the next or previous
category.
1. VOL (volume) control switch
2. TUNE/TRACK switch
3. ON/OFF button
4. SRC (source) select button
5. Display
Models without Navigation System:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3 →
USB*
→
CD/DVD*
→
Music Box** (if so
equipped) → AUX* → AM.
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD:
Music Box hard-disk drive audio system (if
so equipped):
CAUTION
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
to select the next track or the beginning of
the current track.
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
to select the next or the beginning of the
current track.
CD/USB (if so equipped) with MP3/WMA:
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
●
Push and hold the
or
side of
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
the switch to change the playlist.
to select the next track or the beginning of
the current track.
Bluetoothா Audio (if so equipped):
Push the or side of the switch
●
Push and hold the
the switch to change folders.
or
side of
●
to select the next track or beginning of the
current track.
CD/DVD/USB (if so equipped) with com-
pressed audio files:
ANTENNA
●
Push the
or
side of the switch
Window antenna
to select the next track or the beginning of
the current track.
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
●
Push and hold the
or
side of
the switch to change folders.
iPodா (if so equipped):
Push the or
●
side of the switch
to select the next or previous track.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
CAUTION
WARNING
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
WARNING
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
CAUTION
● If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the ve-
hicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●
Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting instruc-
tions.
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
LHA1158
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
●
●
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone
System.
●
●
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
Initialization
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
IC Regulatory information
which takes a few seconds. If the
button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
●
To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
press the
button and after the tone
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
say, “Call Redial.”
If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
also press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
button located on the
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
Example: 1-800-662-6200
pressing the
wheel.
button on the steering
●
If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
– “six six two”
LHA1160
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
– “six two zero zero”
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Dialing” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate a
VR session or answer an incoming
call.
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
Dialing” in this section for more information.
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Choosing a language
You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
You must press the
button or
seconds to
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
the
button within
5
change the language.
To change the language, perform the following.
Press
Press
1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
Current
language
(PHONE/SEND)
(PHONE/END) to
select
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold
to select
Spanish
English
English
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
English
Spanish
French
French
French
Spanish
(
)
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
the
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
PHONE/END (
ferent language.”
) button to select a dif-
button.
3. Press the
TUNING SWITCH
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-
tion.
For color monitor system language change, see
“Language/Units” in this section.
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system (if so equipped).
Connecting procedure
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). Use the following chart to select
the language.
NOTE:
GETTING STARTED
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
3. Say “Phone Number”
. The system ac-
᭺
Main Menu
D
phone
.
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
᭺
A
“Connect phone”
᭺
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
B
“Add phone”
᭺
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
C
Initiate from handset
᭺
C
the area code in single digit format . If the
᭺
D
Name phone
᭺
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
A
2. Say: “Connect phone”
. The system ac-
᭺
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Main Menu
B
3. Say: “Add phone” . The system acknowl-
᭺
A
“Call”
᭺
B
“Phone Number”
᭺
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset
C
.
᭺
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
C
Speak the digits
᭺
D
“Dial”
᭺
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
D
1. Press the
button on the steering
6. Say: “Dial”
. The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
᭺
wheel. A tone will sound.
A
2. Say: “Call”
. The system acknowledges
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
᭺
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
Receiving a call
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
NOTE:
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion.
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the
on the steering wheel.
button
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
B
(Speak Digits)
᭺
“Call”
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
A
(Speak name)
᭺
“Phone Number”
C
“Special Number”
᭺
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
B
(Speak Digits)
᭺
C
“Special Number”
᭺
When you press and release the
button on
D
“Redial”
᭺
“Call Back”
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
D
“Redial”
᭺
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
E
᭺
A
(Speak Name)
᭺
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
“Call back”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
᭺
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
NOTE:
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”and
ends the VR session.
Main Menu
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
During a call
“Phonebook”
A
“Transfer Entry”
᭺
“Delete Entry”
During a call there are several command options
available. Press the
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
button on the steering
B
᭺
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free System,
C
“List Names”
᭺
press the
button.
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா pro-
file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
“Transfer entry”
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
᭺
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
NOTE:
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
A
“List Names”
᭺
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
B
“Transfer Entry”
᭺
B
“Delete Entry”
᭺
C
“Delete Entry”
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
D
“Record Name”
᭺
For phones that support automatic download of
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetoothா profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
that entry.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
C
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetoothா system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
“Transfer entry”
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
᭺
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
NOTE:
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
C
“Delete Entry”
᭺
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
A
“List names”
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
D
“Record name”
᭺
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for in-
formation about recording custom voice tags for
list entries that the system has difficulty pro-
nouncing.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C
“Delete Phone”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
᭺
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
Main Menu
NOTE:
“Recent Calls”
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
A
“Outgoing”
“Incoming”
᭺
B
᭺
Main Menu
C
“Missed”
᭺
“Connect Phone”
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls.
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
B
“Select Phone”
᭺
A
“Outgoing”
᭺
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
C
“Delete Phone”
᭺
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF”
᭺
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetoothா function on the vehicle.
B
“Incoming”
᭺
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
A
“Add Phone”
᭺
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
C
“Missed”
᭺
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
Training procedure
B
“Select Phone”
᭺
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-
aptation has been completed and the sys-
tem is ready.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
next entry
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.
button for more
dial star two one seven oh
yes
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND button for the
The SA mode will stop if:
(
)
no
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
●
The
button is pressed for more than 5
select
seconds in SA mode.
PHONE/END (
ferent language.”
) button to select a dif-
button.
missed
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
dial eight five six nine two
Bluetooth on
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
5. Press the
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
Training phrases
outgoing
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
call three one nine oh two
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
cancel
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phonebook transfer entry
dial three oh four two nine
delete call back number
incoming
call back number
call star two zero nine five
delete phone
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, press the
button.
dial eight three zero five one
record name
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
transfer entry
eight pause nine three two pause seven
delete all entries
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
four three pause two nine pause zero
delete redial number
phonebook list names
call seven two four zero nine
phonebook delete entry
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
call eight oh five four one
correction
●
To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
MANUAL CONTROL (if so equipped)
(
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
connect phone
dial seven four oh one eight
previous entry
●
●
To select the current menu option, press the
PHONE/SEND (
To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
) button.
delete
dial nine seven two six six
call seven six three oh one
go back
holding the PHONE/END (
) button. At that
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
) button
PHONE/END (
Phone system.
) button will exit the
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
call five six two eight zero
dial six six four three seven
Operating tips
●
To exit the manual control mode, press and
●
To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
hold the PHONE/END (
seconds.
) button for 5
(
speak ЉShowing Manual OptionsЉ when
manual controls are initially activated.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom
Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
WHA1350
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-
tion.
●
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●
●
●
Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impos-
sible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
●
Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
If reception between callers is unclear, ad-
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in
this section.
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
●
While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
BLUETOOTH is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
LHA1236
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” key
on the display.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1316
LHA1317
LHA1318
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
3. A popup box will appear on the screen,
prompting you to confirm that the connec-
tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”
key.
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to
enter the PIN code.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.
When the connecting is complete, the
screen will return to the Bluetoothா settings
screen.
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1320
LHA1321
LHA1381
2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the
screen.
5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
to speak when using the Voice Recognition
system.
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
your use. Depending on your phone, the system
may automatically download your entire cell
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone-
book”. For the details on downloading your
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this
section. If your phonebook does not automati-
cally download, you may set up the vehicle
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook
allows you to record a name to speak while using
voice recognition.
3. Choose the method for entering the phone-
book entry. For this example, select “Enter
Number by Keypad”.
6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
the name after the tone.
4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For
more information, see “How to use the
touchscreen” in this section.
7. When the voicetag is successfully saved
(
), select the “OK” key to save the
phonebook entry.
8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the num-
ber. Press the BACK button to return to the
Vehicle Phonebook.
1. Push the PHONE button and select the “Ve-
hicle Phonebook” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of your incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from your cell phone (depending on
your phone’s compatibility). You may select
one of these entries to save in the vehicle
phonebook.
Copy from the Handset
The system will show your cell phone’s
phonebook that was downloaded (depend-
ing on your phone’s compatibility). You may
select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
LHA1382
LHA1383
●
Editing the Vehicle Phonebook
4. Select the desired item to change.
The following editing items are available:
1. Push the PHONE button and select the “Ve-
hicle Phonebook” key.
●
Entry #
2. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list.
Changes the displayed number of the se-
lected entry.
3. Select the “Edit” key.
●
●
●
Name
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
Type
Select the icon from the icon list.
4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Voicetag
To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle
manually, follow these steps:
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. For more information,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in
this section.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Phone” key.
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step
3.
3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”
key.
Once the handset phonebook is transferred to
the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing the
PHONE key on the instrument panel or the
button on the steering wheel, then selecting the
“Handset Phonebook” key.
HANDSET PHONEBOOK
Many phones will support an automatic down-
load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be
stored and entries are automatically assigned
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-
tion system.
LHA1319
Whether the handset phonebook is transferred
manually or automatically, the process can take
up to five minutes to complete, depending on the
size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.
Transferring the handset phonebook
If your cellular phone supports automatic down-
loading, the system transfers the handset phone-
book automatically by default. To ensure that this
feature is activated, press the SETTING button
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should
have the amber indicator next to the word ON
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to
toggle this feature on or off.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Call History: Select the name from the in-
coming or outgoing call history.
Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.
For information on how to use the touch-
screen, see “How to use the touchscreen”in
this section.
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the
listed name is selected. Dialing commences
when “OK”is selected if the number is input-
ted manually. The screen changes to the
“Call in Progress” screen.
LHA1322
LHA1323
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call:
MAKING A CALL
RECEIVING A CALL
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in
Progress screen.
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
one of the procedures listed below.
1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
b. Press the
wheel.
switch on the steering
panel or the
switch on the steering
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on
the display.
c. When the “Call in Progress” screen is
displayed, press the PHONE button on the
instrument panel to hang up. If any other
screen is currently displayed, press the
PHONE button to display the “Call in
Progress” screen first, then press the
PHONE button again to hang up.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
c. Press the phone
wheel switches.
button on the steering
●
Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
●
Handset Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the handset phonebook.
4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
Keypad:
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
mail.
Hold Call:
Put an incoming call on hold.
NOTE:
Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
Pushing the TALK
switch on the
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below:
steering wheel during a call allows num-
bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-
ognition.
a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.
Mute will be cancelled.
b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument
panel.
LHA1324
c. Press and hold the phone
steering wheel switches.
button on the
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
DURING A CALL
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen, if necessary:
Hang up:
Finish the call.
Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
When the “Call in Progress” screen is dis-
played, press the PHONE button on the
instrument panel to hang up. If any other
screen is currently displayed, press the
PHONE button to display the “Call in
Progress” screen first, then press the
PHONE button again to hang up.
LHA1324
LHA1319
ENDING A CALL
PHONE SETTINGS
To finish the call, perform one of the following
procedures:
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Phone” key on the display.
●
Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in
Progress” display.
Edit Vehicle Phonebook:
●
Push the
wheel.
switch on the steering
See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-
ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle
phonebook.
Delete Phonebook:
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.
4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download Handset Phonebook:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the
handset phonebook.
LHA1325
LHA1316
Volume & Ringtone:
BLUETOOTH SETTINGS
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom-
ing call will be placed on hold automatically after
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op-
tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-
ent from the cellular phone’s will sound when
receiving a call.
To set up the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Bluetooth” key on the display.
Bluetooth:
Turn the Bluetoothா system on or off.
Connect Bluetooth:
See “Connecting procedure” in this section for
more information about connecting a phone.
Auto Downloaded:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
information about automatically downloading the
handset phonebook.
Connected Devices:
Display a list of the Bluetoothா devices con-
nected to the system.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Edit Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name, device
address and device PIN.
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-
ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”.
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming
voice during a call by pushing the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the
volume control knob on the instrument panel.
Replace Connected Phone:
Replace the phone currently connected to the
system. This option allows you to keep any voic-
etags that were recorded using the previous
phone.
LHA1253
CALL VOLUME
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
unclear.
●
Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
you to hear a difference in volume.
●
Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
the person you are talking with to hear a
difference in volume.
4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the systems equipped on this ve-
hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter-
nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard
Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-
mance.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE
The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-
tion, phone and vehicle information. With this
setting active, commands that are available are
always shown on the display and announced by
the system.
There are two voice recognition modes of opera-
tion available. They are:
●
●
Standard Mode
Alternate Command Mode
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-
tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,
you can switch to using manual controls (touch-
screen, NISSAN controller, steering wheel con-
trols) and the information you have already en-
tered by voice control will be retained. To switch
to manual controls, select the “Manual Controls”
key on the display when it appears. The system
will respond by speaking “Changing to manual
operation. Please use manual controls to con-
tinue.”
Displaying user guide
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You
can complete your desired operation by simply
following the prompts given by the system. Not all
NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available
while in Standard Mode.
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
for the first time or you do not know how to
operate it, you can display the User Guide for
confirmation.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
For advanced operation, you can change to an
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-
eration of the display, audio, and climate control
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this
mode is active, an expanded list of commands
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-
mand menu prompts are turned off.
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting
is the Standard Mode. See “Standard Mode” in
this section. For vehicles in Canada, the factory
default setting is the Alternate Command Mode.
See “Alternate Command Mode” in this section.
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition
success rate may be affected because the num-
ber of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased. See
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-
mand Mode” in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available items:
●
Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
●
Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve voice recognition by
the system.
●
●
Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book
Finding a Street Address
LHA1326
LHA1329
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
Getting started
Before using the Voice Recognition system for
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of
the User Guide.
●
●
Placing Calls
2. Select the “Others” key.
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
NOTE:
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
Help on Speaking
You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the NISSAN controller or
touching the page down key.
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.
the
switch and saying “Help”.
4. Select the “User Guide” key.
5. Select an item.
4-146 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-
ognition system
If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can
view tutorials on how to perform these operations
using Voice Recognition.
LHA1327
LHA1328
To initiate a practice session, access the User
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow
the on-screen prompts until the session is com-
plete. After the session is completed, a screen
will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ-
ent elements of your speech. Select the “Try
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the
User Guide screen.
Let’s Practice
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows
you to practice saying commands and receive
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your
speech.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the
switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition initialization is completed.
BEFORE STARTING
To get the best recognition performance from
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
LHA1330
LHA1331
Useful tips for correct operation
Voice recognition settings
●
The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing the voice
commands.
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands cor-
rectly.
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system are described.
1. Select “Voice Recognition”.
1. Select “Help on Speaking”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the NISSAN controller.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen using the NISSAN controller or
touching the page down key.
●
●
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
Speak in a natural conversational voice with-
out pausing between words.
If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
4-148 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating tips
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is
.
●
Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the sys-
tem.
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
WHA1332
LHA1333
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
●
●
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to return to the previous screen.
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
If you want to cancel the command, press
and hold the switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
a command.
to
, speak
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone num-
bers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
mance.
How to speak numbers
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
General rule:
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
NOTE:
When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
supported.
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
Examples:
1-800-662-6200
●
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
4-150 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND
Phone
ACTION
Displays Phone function commands.
Displays Navigation function commands.
Displays Vehicle Information.
Displays Audio commands.
Navigation
Information
Audio
Help
Displays User Guide.
Phone Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Change Number
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
Call History
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.
Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
International Call
Navigation Command:
COMMAND
Home
ACTION
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Information Command:
COMMAND
Fuel Economy
Maintenance
Traffic Info.
ACTION
Displays Fuel Economy information.
Displays Maintenance information.
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays current vehicle location.
Where am I?
Audio Command:
COMMAND
AM
ACTION
Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.
Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.
Changes the audio system mode to CD.
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
4-152 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are de-
scribed here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
WHA1332
LHA1333
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
3. Say “Phone”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1334
LHA1335
LHA1336
4. Say “Dial Number”.
5. Say “800”.
6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Say “662”.
4-154 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
●
●
Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
LHA1337
LHA1338
If the system does not recognize your com-
mand, please try repeating the command
using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or
too loudly may further decrease recognition
performance.
8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits or say change number.”
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”
9. Say “6200”.
11. Say “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.
NOTE:
●
You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers”in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA1332
LHA1333
LHA1334
Example 2 — Placing an international call
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
4. Say “International Call”.
1. Press the
ing wheel.
switch located on the steer-
3. Say “Phone”.
4-156 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-
tems as well as additional commands for the
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-
tems. With this setting active, the system does
not announce or display the available commands
at each step.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
pushing the TALK
switch. Under this
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands
is not available on the display. Please review the
expanded command list, available when this
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-
mands are replaced. Please see examples of
Alternate Command Mode screens.
LHA1339
LHA1340
5. Say “011811112223333”.
6. Say “Dial”.
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-
222-3333.
NOTE:
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. You can turn this mode
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process, as
well as the special characters such as star
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1248
LHA1331
LHA1341
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.
6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and
the setting menu is expanded to include the
Alternate Command Mode options. See
“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-
nation of the options.
Activating Alternate Command Mode
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Others” key on the display.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
Displaying the command list
If you are controlling the system by voice com-
mands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
Press the
switch, listen for the tone and
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-
ing the command list main menu.
4-158 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1342
LHA1231
LHA1342
Only manual controls such as the touchscreen
can navigate the command list menu.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
5. Select a category using the NISSAN con-
troller. The command list for the category
selected is shown.
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,
you may access the command list using the fol-
lowing steps:
2. Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN
controller.
6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
NISSAN controller to view the entire list.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition”key using the
NISSAN controller.
7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.
4. Select the “Command List” key using the
NISSAN controller.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alternate Command Mode command list
Phone Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Dial Number
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
International Call
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.
Navigation Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Home
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Previous Start Point
Minimize Freeway Route
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Cancel Route
Delete Destination
Birdview Map
Planview Map
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Cancels the current route.
Deletes the current destination.
Changes the Map display to Birdview.
Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
4-160 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMMAND
ACTION
North Up
Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.
Changes the map scale to a smaller number.
Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Heading Up
Zoom In <1 to 13>
Zoom Out <1 to 13>
Guidance Voice ON/OFF
Guide Voice Repeat
Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.
Information Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
Fuel Economy
Maintenance
Displays Fuel Economy information.
Display Maintenance information.
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays the current vehicle location.
Displays weather information.
Displays the current weather map.
Traffic Information
Where am I?
Weather Information
Weather Map
Audio Command:
COMMAND
ACTION
AM
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
Starts to play a CD.
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
USB
Turns to the USB audio input.
Bluetooth Audio
AUX
Turns to the Bluetoothா audio system.
Turns to the AUX input.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
●
Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
●
●
Voice Recognition Settings
LHA1343
LHA1344
Describes the available Voice Recognition
settings.
5. Select an item.
Displaying user guide
Adapting the System to Your Voice
Available items:
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
Tutorial for adapting the system to your
voice.
●
Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
●
Let’s Practice
2. Select the “Others” key.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve recognition by the
system.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “User Guide” key.
●
Using the Address Book
the
switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the display will show the mes-
sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.
Tutorial for using the Address Book.
4-162 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
Recognition, observe the following:
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
●
When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
WHA1332
LHA1345
●
●
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command from the displayed list or say Help
to show all commands.”
Giving voice commands
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
1. Press and release the
on the steering wheel.
switch located
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
a command.
to
, speak
4. Once a command is recognized, the system
will announce the recognized command and
perform the requested action.
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice after the tone.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
mance.
Operating tips
How to speak numbers
●
Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
.
NOTE:
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
General rule:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
●
●
Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
supported.
●
●
Press the
switch on the steering
wheel to return to the previous screen.
Settings menu
If you want to cancel the command, press
The content of the Settings Menu differs when
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.
and hold the
switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
Examples:
1-800-662-6200
Command List:
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
●
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-
mand Mode.
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
User Guide:
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
To minimize the amount of prompts spoken
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback
function press the SETTING button, then
select the “Others” key. Then select the
“Voice Recognition” key.
The user guide provides basic instructions for
using Voice Recognition and accessing some
voice commands.
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone num-
bers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.
NOTE:
The user guide can also be accessed from
within the INFO menu after pressing the
INFO button.
4-164 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speaker Adaptation:
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-
aptation function” in this section.
Alternate Command Mode:
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-
tion to additional commands for the Phone and
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the
system does not announce or display the avail-
able commands at each step. When this mode is
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will
change to show more options.
LHA1341
LHA1346
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-
rized by the system.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
Minimize Voice Feedback:
The Voice Recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
Reduces the amount of the information spoken
for each voice instruction.
Having the system learn the user’s
voice
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel, select the “Others” key on the
display.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA1347
LHA1348
LHA1349
Speaker Adaptation function settings
Edit Name:
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-
tem from the following list:
7. The system requests that you repeat a com-
mand after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen.
● Phone
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
the screen.
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
● Navigation
● Information
● Audio
screen changes from
to
, speak
Reset Result:
the command that the system requested.
Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-
tion system has learned.
9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
● Help
Continuous Learning:
Press the
return to the previous screen.
switch or the BACK button to
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
system learn the voice commands in succession,
without selecting commands one by one.
If the system has learned the command correctly,
the voice command indicator on the screen turns
on.
6. Select a voice command to train.
The Voice Recognition system starts.
4-166 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret
the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this
section.
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation
System” in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
4-168 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
NISSAN Intelligent key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-9
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . .5-11
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
WARNING
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by
whenever:
a
qualified mechanic
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, located in the
driver’s door opening.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
usual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
Additional information:
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
WARNING
The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some examples are:
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
WARNING
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-
tive times in quick succession or the igni-
tion switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
LSD0237
LSD2000
Type A
Type B
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch po-
sition will illuminate as follows:
The steering wheel is equipped with an anti-theft
steering lock device (if so equipped).
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
Push the ignition switch center:
●
●
●
once to change to ACC.
two times to change to ON.
three times to return to OFF.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. The steering wheel lock (if so equipped) is
designed to prevent steering in case of ve-
hicle theft.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessories):
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display. See
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
The shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hour
under the following conditions:
●
●
all doors are closed.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
For models with a steering wheel lock
mechanism:
shift selector is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
of the following occur:
LOCK (Normal parking position):
●
In order for the steering wheel to be locked,
it must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left
turn from the straight up position.
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
●
●
●
any door is opened.
shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).
ignition switch changes position.
●
To lock the steering wheel, push the
ignition switch to the LOCK position.
To unlock the steering wheel:
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.
ON (Normal operating position):
– push the ignition switch to the OFF
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
position and open any door.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
– with the ignition switch in the ON
position and any door open, push
the ignition switch to the OFF posi-
tion and close the door.
OFF:
CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery.
If the steering wheel lock release malfunction
indicator appears on the vehicle indicator display,
push the ignition switch again while lightly turning
the steering wheel right and left. See “Vehicle
Information Display”in the “Instruments and Con-
trols” section of this manual.
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
WSD0232
WSD0233
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
BATTERY DISCHARGE
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull
C
the Intelligent Key out of the port
.
᭺
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-
A
charged, the guide light
of the Intelligent Key
NOTE:
᭺
port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-
hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator, replace the battery as
soon as possible. See “Battery replace-
ment” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
B
port
allows you to start the engine. Make sure
᭺
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-
tion: The front side faces upward and the key ring
side faces downward as illustrated.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
CAUTION
● Never place anything except the Intelli-
gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-
ing so may cause damage to the
equipment.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may
not start if it is in the wrong direction.
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
●
●
Lock all doors.
Position seat and adjust head restraints and
headrests (if so equipped).
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
●
●
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
●
Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING THE ENGINE
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
1. Apply the parking brake.
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector is in any of the driving
positions.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-
tion switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-
gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector to
the P (Park) position and push the ignition
switch to the OFF position.
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CVT can operate in two different automatic
drive modes:
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or (M) Manual shift mode. Al-
ways depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
●
D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D
(Drive), the transmission is in the normal
forward automatic driving mode. The posi-
tion indicator in the meter shows a “D”. The
D (Drive) mode does not produce a gear
change sensation like a traditional automatic
transmission.
●
Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift se-
lector over from D (Drive) to the left into the
manual shift gate. The position indicator in
the meter shows a “Ds”. In Ds (Drive Sport)
mode, transmission operation changes to
ЉSporty” driving shift operation, creating a
more aggressive acceleration feeling than
the D (Drive) mode and a gear change sen-
sation when the driver accelerates quickly.
When the driver selects M (Manual) mode
ratio with shift selector or shift paddles (if so
equipped) during Ds (Drive Sport) mode
operation, the driver must move the shift
selector from Ds mode to D mode and back
again to re-select Ds (Drive Sport) mode.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
LSD0238
●
To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift se-
lector to the D (Drive) position. The trans-
mission returns to the automatic drive mode.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CVT can operate in two manual drive modes:
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
●
M (Manual) mode - With the shift selector in
the manual shift gate Ds (Drive Sport) mode,
M (Manual) mode can be selected by mov-
ing the shift selector up (+) or down (–) or
using the shift paddles (if so equipped) up
(+) or down (–). In M mode, the transmission
will produce noticeable upshifts and down-
shifts. The position indicator in the meter
shows a “M”.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position.
●
●
Temporary M (Manual) shift mode - With the
shift selector in the D (Drive) mode and if the
shift paddle is moved + (up) or - (down), the
transmission will temporarily switch to the M
(Manual) mode. If the shift paddles are not
used after 5 - 10 seconds, the transmission
will return to the D (Drive) mode.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
WSD0242
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
To move the shift selector:
Push the button while depressing the brake
pedal
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
Push the button to shift
To cancel the M (Manual) mode and return to
the D (Drive) mode, press and hold either
shift paddle for 3 - 5 seconds.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Shift without pushing button
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the
LOCK or ACC position.
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse):
Ds (Drive sport):
WARNING
When the shift selector is shifted from the D
(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, the
transmission enters the Ds (Drive Sport) mode.
Moving the shift selector to the Ds (Drive Sport)
position allows smooth acceleration or decelera-
tion on a hilly road by moving into a lower gear
automatically. When canceling the Ds mode, re-
turn the shift selector to the D (Drive) position.
The transmission returns to the normal driving
mode.
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
P (Park):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the
parking brake first, then move the shift selector
into the P (Park) position.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M5 (5th):
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
M1 (First):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
WSD0243
LSD0193
●
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 6
range. This reduces fuel economy.
lected using the shift paddles (if so equipped) on
Manual shift mode
B
C
the steering wheel
and . In the manual shift
᭺
᭺
When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport)
position, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-
ally by moving the shift selector up or down, or
pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter.
To cancel the Ds mode, return shift selector to the
D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to
automatic driving mode.
mode, the shift range is displayed on the position
indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift
selector to the manual shift gate, the position
indicator displays 1 (first) up to 6 (sixth) depend-
ing on vehicle speed.
When shifting up:
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6
M6 (6th):
Move the shift selector to the Ϫ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate
stopped or while driving, the transmission enters
the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be se-
lected manually. Shift ranges can also be se-
●
Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
A
with the vehicle
᭺
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
To move the shift selector, complete the following
procedure:
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. For cap removal it must be used or if it is
available a plastic trim tool can be used
4. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.
WSD0236
Shift lock release
5. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift selector button pushed.
6. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
●
●
CVT operation is limited to automatic drive
mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-
tremely low even if manual shift mode is
selected. This is not a malfunction. When
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be
selected.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section. Contact your
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
7. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-
hicle may be moved to the desired location.
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-
mission as soon as possible.
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fail-safe
WARNING
WARNING
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction indicator light
(MIL)”in the “Instrument and controls”sec-
tion. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
push the switch back to the ON position.
The vehicle should return to its normal op-
erating condition. If it does not return to its
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
When the high fluid temperature protec-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially care-
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
side of the road at a safe place and allow
the transmission to return to normal op-
eration, or have it repaired if necessary.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position and manual
shift mode
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into lower range, depending on the
vehicle speed.
normal operating condition, have
a
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and
repair if necessary.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
LSD0158
WSD0231
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL button.
Tap the brake pedal.
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
Push the ON·OFF switch off. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument panel goes
out.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
The cruise control is automatically canceled if:
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
●
you depress the brake pedal while pushing
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
The preset speed is deleted from memory.
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel will illuminate.
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
A
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
C
CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
WSD0050
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
WARNING
4. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
●
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift
selector has been pushed as far forward
as it can go and cannot be moved without
depressing the foot brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.
WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
Self-test feature
WARNING
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Using the system
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Normal operation
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the
system will control braking and engine output to
help keep the vehicle on its steered path.
When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
indicates that the VDC system is working prop-
erly.
●
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
system is operating, the
the instrument panel blinks.
indicator in
●
If the
indicator blinks, the road condi-
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your
speed and driving to these conditions. See
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
WARNING
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
designed to help improve driving stabil-
ity but does not prevent accidents due
to abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
●
Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
and
indicator lights come
on in the instrument panel.
As long as these indicator lights are on, the
traction control function is canceled.
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system off using the VDC OFF
switch, VDC and the Traction Control System
(TCS) functions will be turned off. The
indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The
ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
approved for your vehicle or are ex-
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect ve-
hicle handling performance, and the
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate
properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol off indicator light may come on.
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
equipped).
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
chains on a snow covered road.
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
system may not operate properly and
the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-
tor light may come on.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system
may not operate properly and the VDC
OFF indicator light may come on. Do
not drive on these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off
indicator light may illuminate. This is
not a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
Starting and driving 5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
WARNING
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
5-26 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
● Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.
Starting and driving 5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
5-28 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
FLAT TIRE
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-
ers”in the “Instruments and controls”section and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section.
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the CVT is shifted into P
(Park).
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
WCE0044
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
Blocking wheels
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
᭺
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
᭺
jacked up.
4. Turn off the engine.
WARNING
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCE0186
LCE0198
LCE0187
Type A
Type A
Type B
Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the trunk. Remove the floor carpeting.
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCE0199
WCE0189
WCE0188
Type B
Lift the spare tire cover.
1
2
Remove the jack
and wheel nut wrench
Remove the spare tire.
᭺
᭺
from the tool box on the right side of the trunk
compartment.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
CE1089
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LCE0020
WCE0056
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
A
B
C
D
in the sequence illustrated (
,
,
,
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
,
E
). Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
᭺
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label affixed to
the driver’s door opening.
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
7. Close the trunk.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with
wrench.
a
torque
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (112 N·m)
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WCE0054
3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
A
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
B
C
D
illustrated (
,
,
,
).
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
CAUTION
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.).
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading) or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
CAUTION
● CVT models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
WARNING
● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4
seconds before trying again.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to P (Park).
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
WARNING
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
WARNING
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
ACE0511
SCE0199A
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When towing CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground, dollies must be
used or place the vehicle on a flat bed
truck.
CAUTION
● Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
● When towing with the front wheels on
towing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. For
models with a steering wheel lock
mechanism: Never secure the steer-
ing wheel by placing the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism.
WCE0190
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-
tral) position.
●
When towing CVT models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
In case of emergency 6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
Rocking a stuck vehicle
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING
● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
vice.
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-
tem.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
6-14 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.
WAXING
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
UNDERBODY
CAUTION
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
WAI0007
GLASS
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so
equipped) is removed first.
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1
Push toward rear of vehicle.
᭺
2
Lift to remove.
᭺
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
CHROME PARTS
WARNING
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-
come excessively worn.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
LPD0477
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side
floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in
them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole
while centering the mat in the footwell.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Temperature
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . .8-11
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
In-cabin microfilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
●
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints and
headrests move up and down smoothly and the
lock knobs (if so equipped) hold securely in all
adjustable positions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the
reservoir.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
Window-washer fluid* Check that there is ad-
equate fluid in the reservoir.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before working
near the fan.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift selector to
P (Park).
● If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component har-
nesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Engine coolant reservoir*
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir*
NOTE:
Side covers removed for clarity.
WDI0662
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide
year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.
The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-
sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system
additives are not necessary.
WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only
NISSAN radiator cap.
a
genuine
LDI0734
To remove the engine compartment covers, un-
A
hook the clips
located as illustrated.
᭺
To remove the engine cover, pull the cover up-
1
ward first
and then toward the front of the
᭺
2
vehicle
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
CAUTION
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solu-
tions may damage the engine cooling
system.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
°C
°F
LDI0554
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
-35
-30
50%
50%
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
B
the MIN level
᭺
, add coolant to the MAX level
᭺
A
. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
A
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level
.
᭺
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
WDI0663
WDI0214
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
level. It should be between the H (High) and
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
B
L (Low) marks
. This is the normal oper-
᭺
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap
᭺
and pour recommended oil through the
C
opening. Do not overfill
.
᭺
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
CAUTION
minutes.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
A
(under the body).
᭺
7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
B
5. Remove the oil filler cap
(inside the en-
᭺
gine compartment) by turning it counter-
clockwise.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
A
6. Remove the drain plug
with a wrench by
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
8. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information”section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
Check your local regulations.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
LDI0641
9. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dip-
stick. Add engine oil if necessary.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
CAUTION
● Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
LDI0642
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
A
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
.
᭺
A
4. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
᭺
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
For further brake fluid specification information,
refer to “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended fluid
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
is
Genuine
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
LDI0557
● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of reach of children.
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-
voir tank with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer reservoir tank.
LDI0558
WDI0664
BRAKE FLUID
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer reservoir
tank. Do not use the windshield-washer
reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-
plosive. Explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0529
LDI0694
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall
the vent caps.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE BELT
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
LDI0564
A
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Generator
3. Air conditioner compressor
4. Crankshaft pulley
The current sensor
is located near the battery
᭺
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
AIR CLEANER
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
SDI1895
WDI0665
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped
᭺
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs in
the direction indicated and pull the unit upwards.
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
WDI0194
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
CLEANING
CAUTION
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
REPLACING
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1
Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
᭺
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
᭺
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
3
Remove the wiper blade.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
WDI0337
Be careful not to let anything get into the washer
. This may cause clogging or improper
windshield washer operation. If something gets
A
nozzle
᭺
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small
B
pin
.
᭺
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUSES
LDI0455
LDI0457
LDI0560
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type
is used in
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
᭺
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse
᭺
CAUTION
box.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
WDI0452
A
5. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
᭺
B
fuse
.
᭺
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LDI0328
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
WDI0452
LDI0456
Type A
A
Type B
4. If the fuse is open
, replace it with an
.
᭺
B
equivalent good fuse
᭺
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
A
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver
into the slit
᭺
᭺
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
lent.
WDI0568
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
C
D
᭺ ᭺
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
WDI0567
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
HIGH VOLTAGE
Ꮨ
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
semble. Always have your xenon head-
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section.
● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly
High (Halogen)
65
55
35
28/8
5
9005 (HB3)
H11
Low (Halogen) (if so equipped)
Low (Xenon) (if so equipped)
Park/Turn
D2S
3457NAK
WY5W
H11
Side marker
Front fog light (if so equipped)
Front personal/map lights
Glove box light
55
8
—
3.4
1.4
3.8
8
158
Vanity mirror light
—
Step light
194
Rear personal lights
Door switch illumination
High-mounted stop light (Type A)
High-mounted stop light (Type B)
Trunk light
—
—
LED
—
LED
—
LED
3.4
158
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop
—
21
18
5
LED
WY21W
921
Turn signal
Backup (reversing)
Sidemarker
W5W
168
License plate light
Foot well light
5
3.4
158
* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Headlight assembly
2. Map light
3. Rear personal lights
4. Fog light (if so equipped)
5. Step light
6. High-mounted stop light (Type A)
7. Trunk light
8. High-mounted stop light (Type B)
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light
WDI0666
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WDI0667
WDI0340
Vanity mirror light
Front personal/map lights
1
1
Use a cloth
to protect the housing.
Use a cloth
to protect the housing.
᭺
᭺
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LDI0341
WDI0670
WDI0343
Trunk light
Step light
Rear personal light
1
1
Use a cloth
to protect the housing.
Use a cloth
to protect the housing.
᭺
᭺
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
tion”in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
and voice recognition” section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in
the “Starting and driving” section, and
“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
Set the tire pressure to the normal cold
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle
speed or load is reduced.
Tire inflation pressure
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays pres-
sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on
the display screen by sending a signal
from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel.
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the ЉCold Tire PressureЉ heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire pressure informa-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● Increase the cold tire inflation
pressure as indicated in ؆Check-
ing tire pressure؆ later in this sec-
tion when using the tires speci-
fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH
(162 km/h) where it is legal to do
so (on a race track for example).
Failure to increase the cold tire
inflation pressure may result in
tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. After such use,
readjust tire pressure.
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
᭺
Spare tire size (if so equipped).
LDI2000
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire and loading information label
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-
mation in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section.
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Size
Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
P245/45VR18
P245/40VR19
P245/40WR19
P245/45VR18
P245/40VR19
P245/40WR19
T145/80D17
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
Front Original Tire
Rear Original Tire
Spare Tire (Temporary)
T145/80R17
WDI0394
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
1
᭺
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4
sure
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
WDI0396
Example
5
᭺
Maximum load rating
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
᭺
The word “radial”
TYPES OF TIRES
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
All season tires
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
mance may be adversely affected.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on P245/40VR19 size tires. Installation of
the tire chains/cables on P245/40VR19
size tires will cause damage to the ve-
hicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables,
you should install P245/45VR18 size tires
on your vehicle.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
WDI0258
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (112 N·m)
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
WDI0259
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
WARNING
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
● Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing wheels and tires
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system and/or interference
with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-
ference can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe
wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
● The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain
clearance, speedometer calibration,
headlight aim and bumper height.
Some of these effects may lead to acci-
dents and could result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Wheel balance
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of wheels
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
WARNING
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
CAUTION
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-26
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-27
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure
20 gal
Imp measure
Liter
75.6
Fuel
16-5/8 gal
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96) *1
Engine oil *7
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change
4-7/8 qt
4-1/2 qt
4 qt
4.6
4.3
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2, *3
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *2, *3
Without oil filter change
3-3/4 qt
Cooling system
With reservoir
2-1/8 gal
1-3/4 gal
8.2
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
CVT fluid
See a NISSAN dealer for service.
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *4
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake fluid
Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*8
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Windshield washer fluid
HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or
equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation”.
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation”.
*3: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at your NISSAN dealer.
*4: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations”.
*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
*8: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may be used.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-
leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-
line is not available, you may use unleaded regular
gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI
number (Research octane number 91), but you
may notice a decrease in performance.
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
●
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
Reformulated gasoline
CAUTION
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with
or without advertising their presence. NISSAN
does not recommend the use of fuels of which the
oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for
your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in
doubt, ask your service station manager.
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
Octane rating tips
CAUTION
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
WTI0183
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
towing a trailer
stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
VQ35DE
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
1–2–3–4–5–6
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
Idle speed
CVT (in “N” position)
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
FXE22HR11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front Track
18 inch tire
19 inch tire
Rear Track
18 inch tire
19 inch tire
Wheelbase
in (mm) 190.6(4,843)
in (mm) 73.2(1,860)
in (mm) 57.8(1,467)
Wheels
18 x 8.0J
19 x 8.0J
in (mm) 62.4(1,585)
in (mm) 62.4(1,585)
Tires
P245/45VR18
P245/40VR19
P245/40WR19
in (mm) 62.4(1,585)
in (mm) 62.4(1,585)
in (mm) 109.3(2,775)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. certification label” on
Spare tire
T145/80D17
T145/80R17
the center pillar between the
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
driver’s side front and rear
doors.
Speed rating
18”
19”
19”
V
V
W
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
WTI0171
LTI0070
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WTI0049
WTI0172
WTI0173
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
WTI0174
WTI0167
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
WTI0203
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
1
Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in
(8 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.
Install the license plate holder using the two
screws provided with the holder.
᭺
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing)
-
maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
2
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Mount the license plate using two M6-
14mm bolts.
᭺
License plate bolt tightening torque:
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
TERMS
tion
is
located
on
the
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152
Example
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
LOADING TIPS
● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.
WARNING
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
CAUTION
●
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
LTI0164
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could ad-
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-
formance.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature conditions also can affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The trans-
mission high fluid temperature protection mode,
which helps reduce the chance of transmission
damage, could activate and automatically de-
crease engine power. Under some conditions,
engine and vehicle speed could be reduced. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle
load, weather, and road conditions.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and lower vehicle speed. Also,
when the high temperature mode oper-
ates, engine and vehicle speed may be
gradually reduced. On highways, the re-
duced speed may be lower than other traf-
fic which could increase the chance of a
collision. Be especially careful when driv-
ing. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe
driving speed, pull to the side of the road
in a safe area and allow the engine to cool
or the transmission to return to normal
operation. See “If your vehicle overheats”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
WTI0160
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue
load must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
TI1012M
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
Example:
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 4,446 lb. (2016 kg).
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
4,546 lb. (2062 kg).
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
4,546 lb. (2062 kg)
GVWR
GVW
WARNING
– 4,446 lb. (2016 kg)
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
= 100 lb. (45 kg)
Available for tongue
weight
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
UNIT: lb (kg)
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for
towing
MAXIMUM TOWING
1,000 (454)
LOAD *1
MAXIMUM TONGUE
100 (45)
LOAD
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight
Hitch ball
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)
=
Available capacity
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated
assuming a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
10 % tongue weight
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
TOWING SAFETY
trailer tongue load specification recommended Trailer hitch
The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this
section.
Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Ball mount
CAUTION
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
Safety chains
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer lights
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking
systems are activated by an electronic sig-
nal sent from a trailer brake controller
(special brake-sensing module).
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used. However, most
states require a separate braking system
on trailers with a loaded weight above a
specific amount. Make sure the trailer
meets the local regulations and the regu-
lations where you plan to tow.
Have a professional supplier of towing
equipment make sure the trailer brakes
are properly installed and demonstrate
proper brake function testing.
Pre-towing tips
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
Several types of braking systems are
available. Some examples are listed
below:
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator
is mounted on the trailer tongue with a
hydraulic line running to each trailer
wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the
trailer pushing against the hitch ball when
the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge
brakes are common on rental trailers and
some boat trailers. In this type of system,
there is no hydraulic or electric connec-
tion for brake operation between the tow
vehicle and the trailer.
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
Trailer brakes
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
●
●
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
Trailer towing tips
●
While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-
tain adequate control, reduce your speed
and use the manual shift mode (M5). Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes when
descending a hill, as this reduces their effec-
tiveness and could cause overheating. Shift-
ing the manual shift mode to M5 (5th) pro-
vides “engine braking”and reduces the need
to brake as frequently.
CAUTION
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-
ently becoming unlatched.
●
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
●
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
●
Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
●
●
Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-
mission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
When towing a trailer, transmission fluid
should be changed more frequently. For
additional information, see the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in
this manual.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
FLAT TOWING
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
●
●
Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle.
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
trol not be used while towing a trailer.
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
CAUTION
WARNING
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-
sion vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
Temperature A, B and C
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency”section of
this manual.
Continuously Variable Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-
turer’s recommendations when using their prod-
uct.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
●
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
●
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
9. Turn the engine off.
WARNING
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic con-
ditions and obey all traffic laws.
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until
step 7 is completed.
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle
points between the C and H (normal oper-
ating temperature).
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready”condition. Before taking the
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-
dition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-
utes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
For USA
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
1-800-247-5321
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Canada
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
Why should you take a chance?
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-
self.
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
It’s your right!
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-75
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Bluetoothா hands-free phone system. . . .4-118,
4-133
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Air bag system
Audio System
iPodா Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92, 4-93
Music Box hard-disk drive audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97, 4-102
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Brake
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Air conditioner
Audio system
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-23
Brake fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-20
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Brightness control
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Audio System
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70, 4-76
Audio system
Steering wheel audio control switch. . .4-114
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87, 4-88
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic
Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-29
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-44
Automatic transmission position indicator
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Transmission shift selector lock release. .5-16
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-25
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner
controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-45
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Alarm system
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-15, 4-31
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-24
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-10, 2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-23
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Bluetoothா audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-66
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-72, 4-79
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
C
Capacities and recommended
B
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
CD changer (See audio system) . . . . . . .4-66
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD player (See audio system) . . . . . .4-72, 4-79
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-20, 1-20, 1-21, 1-23
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-32, 1-36
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock
(models with navigation system) . . .4-12, 4-26
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-26
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-79
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-31
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-84
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32
Display controls
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16
Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-21
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Driving
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . .4-15, 4-31
Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-24
Without navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-114
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-45
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Coolant
F
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-33
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
E
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25
Engine
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Folding rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-46
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-13
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
iPodா Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92, 4-93
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetoothா . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118, 4-133
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-28
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Heater
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-45
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-42, 4-45
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-47
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-53
Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
G
K
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
I
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-13
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2
Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7
Image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3, 5-10
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . . . . .3-25
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . .9-10
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-53
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
License plate
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-23
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3, 5-10
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-145
M
Maintenance
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . . . .9-11
Light
O
Changing the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-22
Displaying the maintenance notice
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-48
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Warning/indicator lights and audible
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Resetting the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-22
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-22
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-32
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-25
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Music Box hard-disk drive audio
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats. . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Lock
P
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-19
Parking
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-97, 4-102
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118, 4-133
Power
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47
Rear sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-25
Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-21
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Seats
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Precautions
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-29
Front seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3, 5-10
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-24
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shifting
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-32, 1-36
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-13
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-24
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
S
Continuously Variable Transmission
Safety
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-18
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Steering
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . .4-114
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-21, 1-27, 1-32, 1-36
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3
Seat belt
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-118
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . . .4-66
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-13
Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-18
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-16
changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-75
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69
Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-114
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-53, 2-14
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-46
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-53
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39
Supplemental restraint system
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
U
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-42
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-24
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
USB interface
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-87, 4-88
Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
V
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-39
Switch
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-24
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-44
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Towing
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Transceiver
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-53
Transmission
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Driving with Continuously Variable
immobilizer system), engine start. .2-25, 3-3, 5-10
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-145
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Shift selector lock release. . . . . . . . . .5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . .1-5, 1-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-3, 5-10
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . .2-10, 2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-48
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-53
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-43
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-26
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-
leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-
line is not available, you may use unleaded regu-
lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87
AKI number (Research octane number 91), but
you may notice a decrease in performance.
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark
Viscosity SAE 5W-30
●
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
CAUTION
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing : March 2010 (04)
OM0E 0A35U1
Publication No.:
Printed in U.S.A.
A35-D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
